Home
Bibles
Biblical topics
Bible Study
 
Articles
Coptics
Orthodoxy
Pope Shenouda
Father Matta
Bishop Mattaous
Bishop Moussa
Bishop Alexander
Habib Gerguis
Agbia
Synaxarium
Saints
Fasts & Feasts
Family & Youth
Christian
Ethics
Patrology
Tutorial
3ds Max 2016
Account Payable
Accounts Receivable
ActionScript
Active Directory
Adaptive Access Manager
Adobe Premiere Pro
Ajax
Android
Apache Hive
ASP
Asset Management
AutoCAD
Banner
Big data
Building OA Framework
Business Intelligence
C Sharp
Calculus
Cash Management
CISCO
Cognos
CRM
Crystal Reports
Data Acquisition
Data Architecture
Data Archiving
Data Guard
Data Mining
Data Modeling
Data Structure
Data Visualization
Database
DataWarehouse
Design Illustration
Dodeca
Dreamweaver
DRM
DW ELT
E-Commerce
Erwin
Essbase
Expression Web
FDM
Fusion Middleware
General Ledger
Google Drive
GoPro Studio
Hacking
Hadoop
HFM
HRMS
HTML5 CSS3
Hyperion Planning
Index
Informatica
iOS
Java
JavaBeans
JavaScript
JQuery
 
Linux
LYNC SERVER 2013
MapReduce
Massive UE4
MetricStream
Microstrategy
MS Access 2016
MS Exchange Server
MS OneNote 2016
MS OneNote 2016 
MS Outlook 2016
MS PowerPoint 2016
MS Publisher 2016
MS SharePoint 2016
MS Word
MS-Dynamics
MYSQL-PHP
Networking
OBIEE
OpenGL
Oracle 12c Administration
Oracle DEMAND PLANNING
Oracle EBS
Oracle E-business tax
Oracle Financial Applications
Oracle Identity Manager
Oracle Mobile
Oracle Payroll Fundamentals
Oracle Performance Tuning
Oracle Product Lifecycle
Oracle project
Oracle Purchasing
Oracle RAC admin
Oracle SOA admin
Peoplesoft
Perl
Photoshop CS6
Pig
PLSQL
PowerShell
Programming
Project
Project Management
Python
R Programming
SAP
SAS
SQL
SQL Server
Subledger Accounting
Supply Chain Planning
Tableau
Template
TeraData
Toad
TSQL
UML
Unix
VBA
Visio
Visual Basic
Visual Studio
Weblogic Server
Windows 10
Windows Server
XML

 

 

   CONDITIONAL SENTENCES IN THE

                   NEW TESTAMENT

 

 

 

 

 


 

 

 

 

 

                                                         by

 

                                             William E. Elliott

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

                        Submitted in partial fulfillment of requirements

                              for the degree of Doctor of Theology in

                                        Grace Theological Seminary

                                                      May 1981

 

                      Digitized by Ted Hildebrandt, Gordon College 2006


 

Title:  CONDITIONAL SENTENCES IN THE GREEK NEW TESTAMENT

Author:         William E. Elliott

Degree:        Doctor of Theology

Date:            May 1981

Committee: Dr. Charles R. Smith, Dr. John A. Sproule, Dr. Homer A. Kent, Jr.

 

          Increasing interest in the grammar of the Greek New Testament

has focused attention upon aspects of the language that have, for the

most part, been passed over by past grammarians. Among these topics

is that of conditional sentences. A superficial survey of the lit-

erature indicates that most writers seem to have the data confidently

in tow, but closer inspection shows that this is not the case. Modern

grammarians are, for the most part, content to follow the lead of A.T.

Robertson and classify these clauses in terms of First, Second, Third,

and Fourth Class conditions. Others, dissatisfied with Robertson's

system and the extension of it by his followers, have returned to the

terminology, if not the principles of Classical Greek. The situation

is uncoordinated at best, for even in Classical Greek studies there

is significant disagreement upon the classification of these sentences.

          The historical background to the study of conditional sentences

is presented from both the Classical and the Koine Greek standpoints.

Suggested systems of classification include Time, Fulfillment, Form

and Determination. The latter, championed by B.L. Gildersleeve, is

the preferred system. Determination is indicated by the mood of the

verbs employed in the protasis. Gildersleeve's system entered Koine

studies primarily through the work of A.T. Robertson. He employes

four classes into which he places these conditional sentences.

          The Simple Condition, using the indicative mood, states the

condition as an assumed reality. There is no necessary connection

between actuality and the statement. This condition merely presents

the conclusion as a necessary corollary of the condition.

          The Contrary to Fact Condition also uses the indicative mood

to present the condition as one that is assumed not true, i.e., con-

trary to fact. Again, there is no necessary connection between

actuality and the conditional statement.

          The Probable Condition presents the condition as one assumed

probable, i.e., one that could easily be fulfilled. The hypothetical

nature of this condition requires the use of the subjunctive mood.

          The Possible condition states the condition as one that is

assumed possible, i.e., little likelihood of fulfillment. This con-

dition utilizes the optative mood, and there is no complete example

of it in the New Testament.

          Two basic concepts underlie all conditional sentences. First,

the determining factor is the mood of the verb, not the particle em-

ployed. Second, all conditional sentences state their case as an

assumption, never as a direct statement of reality.

 


 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

            Accepted by the Faculty of Grace Theological Seminary

                in partial fulfillment of requirements for the degree

                                          Doctor of Theology

 

 

                                         Examining Committee:

 

                                        Charles R. Smith

 

                                                 Homer A. Kent Jr.

 

                                         John A. Sproule

 


 

                             TABLE OF CONTENTS

 

INTRODUCTION                                                                                 1

 

CHAPTER

I.   A HISTORICAL SURVEY                                                               4

          Conditional Sentences in General                                                  4

          Conditional Sentences in Classical Greek                                                8

                    The Importance of Classical Greek                                      10

                    Suggested Classification Systems                                                 10

                              Classification According to Time                              11

                              Classification According to Fulfillment                     18

                              Classification According to Form                              20

                              Classification According to Determination                 23

          Conditional Sentences in Koine Greek                                           33

                    Early Grammarians                                                                       34

                              George Benedict Winer                                             34

                              Alexander Buttmann                                                37

                              Samuel G. Green                                                      40

                              Ernest DeWitt Burton                                               42

                              James Hope Moulton                                               46

                    Modern Grammarians                                                        49

                              Archibald Thomas Robertson                                   49

                              William Douglas Chamberlain                                   55

                              Charles Francis Digby Moule                                    57

                              Friedrich Blass - Albert Debrunner                            60

                              Nigel Turner                                                            62

                              H. E. Dana and Julius R. Mantey                                         65

                              Robert W. Funk                                                       67

                              William Sanford La Sor                                            65

                    Summary of Koine Grammarians                                        71

 

II.   THE SIMPLE CONDITION                                                              73

         

          Introduction                                                                                 73

          The Conditional Particle ei                                                             75

                    The Significance of ei                                                  75

                    The Significance of ei with other Particles                            77

          The Negative Particles in Simple Conditions                                  81

          Ean with the Indicative Mood                                                        84

          Significance of Moods and Tenses                                                          88

 

                                          i
                                                                                                                    ii

 

          Meaning of the Simple Condition                                                  95

                    Particular and General Conditions                                                 95

                    Degree of Reality                                                               98

          Translation of the Simple Condition                                               105

 

III.      THE CONTRARY TO FACT CONDITION                                  106

          Introduction                                                                                 106

          Significance of Tense                                                                   110

                    Imperfect Tense                                                                 110

                    Aorist Tense                                                                                 113

                    Pluperfect Tense                                                                 115

          The Use of An in Contrary to Fact Conditions                                 116

          The Meaning of the Contrary to Fact Condition                                       121

          The Translation of the Contrary to Fact Condition                          123

 

IV.     THE PROBABLE CONDITION                                                   129

          Introduction                                                                                 129

          Analysis of the Probable Condition                                                131

                    The Protasis                                                                       131

                    The Apodosis                                                                     141

          Meaning of the Probable Condition                                               148

                    Review of the Grammarians                                               148

                    Evaluation of the Grammarians                                           151

                    Relationship with the Simple Condition                               156

                    Summary                                                                           163

          Translation of the Probable Condition                                           165

 

V.      THE POSSIBLE CONDITION                                                      169

          Introduction                                                                                 169

          The Optative Mood in General                                                      170

          The Optative Mood in Conditional Sentences                                 174

                    The Construction                                                                175

                    The Significance                                                                 178

                    The Grammarians                                                              178

                    The Specific Examples                                                       180

                              Those with the Protasis Implied                                180

                              Those with the Protasis Stated                                   184

          Translation of the Possible Condition                                            191

 

VI.     CONCLUSION                                                                            193

          Simple Conditions                                                                        194

          Unreal Conditions                                                                        195

          Probable Conditions                                                                               195

          Possible Conditions                                                                      196

          Summary                                                                                     196

 


                                                                                                                   iii

 

APPENDICES                                                                                       198

          Appendix I: Occurrences of the Simple Condition                          198

          Appendix II: Occurrences of the Unreal Condition                         211

          Appendix III: Occurrences of the Probable Condition                     215

 

BIBLIOGRAPHY                                                                                   226

 


 

 

 

 

                                  INTRODUCTION

 

          God created man with the potential for abstract reasoning, and

his many languages reflect this through their use of the subjunctive

mood: the mood of contingency or possibility. Posing questions,

exploring possibilities and analyzing logical connections are part of

man's reasoning capabilities, and his languages reflect these skills.

Among the syntactical tools which accomplish these are conditional

sentences. These sentences, usually consisting of two clauses,

state a hypothesis and give a conclusion. In English this corres-

ponds to the "If . . . then" formula.

          This type of sentence, while prevalent in English, is usually

listed as one of several subordinate clause relationships.1  By

contrast, the Greek language presents a more fully developed system

of conditional sentences by means of which a remarkable degree of

precision may be obtained in expressing conditional thought. The

Greek conditional sentence presents both the condition and certain

specific implications about it in one sentence whereas English needs

both the conditional statement and qualifying sentences to communicate

the same concept. This compactness lends itself to greater precision

 

          1 Porter Perrin and George H. Smith, Handbook of Current

English, third edition, edited by Jim W. Corder (Glenview, Illinois:

Scott, Foresman and Company, 1968), 48-56, 120-121.

 


                                                                                                                             2

in the statement of conditional concepts.

          Since conditional sentences are basic to the material of the

Greek New Testament, a detailed understanding of conditional sentences

is vital for an accurate interpretation of its contents. This, then,

is the goal of this study: to explore conditional sentences so that the

message of the New Testament may be better understood.

          Though all students of Greek, both Classical and Koine, agree

on the importance of conditional sentences, few agree on the analysis

of them. A. T. Robertson aptly describes the situation in Koine studies

when he writes, "In truth the doctors have disagreed themselves and the

rest have not known how to go."1 The Classical scene is likewise

muddled, as Blass-Debrunner notes, "The classical grammars are also hope-

lessly at variance."2

          Some of this confusion is due to the absence of a standard by

which to classify conditional sentences. Time, degree of reality and

construction have all been suggested by various grammarians as possible

classification systems. Further, each grammarian seems to have developed

his own terminology in discussing the subject, and each argues that his

is best. Indeed, it is possible to trace the influence of major

grammarians through succeeding generations by noting who adopts their

terminology in dealing with conditional sentences.

 

          1 A. T. Robertson, A Grammar of the Greek New Testament in the

Light of Historical Research (Nashville, Tennessee: Broadman Press,

1934), p. 1004.

          2 Friedrich Blass and Alvert Debrunner, A Greek Grammar of the

New Testament and Other Early Christian Literature, translated and

revised by Robert W. Funk (Chicago: The University of Chicago Press,

1961), p. 189.

 


                                                                                                                         3

          Another reason for the lack of standardization may be the

inherent flexibility of the language itself. Though Classical and Koine

Greek may be considered fossilized ancestors of Modern Greek, they were

living, functioning languages, complete with the internal syntactical

elasticity found in living languages today. Greek, like English, developed

through usage, and patterns so developed may refuse to be forced into a

logically consistent mold. So, whether through lack of a standard, or

lack of accepted terminology, or through syntactical flexibility,

conditional sentences have provided grammarians with a fruitful area of

contemplation, and students with a frustrating area of concentration.

          This study seeks to offer help to those involved in the

analysis of conditional sentences by summarizing the work of previous

grammarians and giving a detailed analysis of each type of conditional

sentence in the New Testament. The work of past and contemporary

scholars will be surveyed to give an overview of their studies, agree-

ments, and disagreements. Then the conditional sentences in the Greek

New Testament will be identified and analyzed with the help of principles

obtained from the grammatical survey. Finally, observations will be

offered on the important matters of translation and interpretation.

The result should be a small but positive step in gaining further insight

into the meaning of conditional sentences in the Greek New Testament.

 


 

 

 

                                      CHAPTER I

 

                           A HISTORICAL SURVEY

 

          Since any study necessarily builds upon the work of others, a

survey of previous studies of conditional sentences is basic to a

thorough understanding of the topic. This study will include the work

of both Classical and Koine scholars.

                         Conditional Sentences in General

          A brief survey of the technical details of conditional sentences

will set the scene for the succeeding discussion and evaluation.

 

                      The Definition of Conditional Sentences

          A conditional sentence is a two-clause sentence in which the

first clause states a supposition or hypothesis and the second clause

states the results if that condition is met. The hypothetical clause

which states the condition ("If this . . .") is termed the protasis

and the conclusion clause is called the apodosis (". . . then this.").

Herbert Weir Smyth explains it this way:

 

          A condition is a supposition on which a statement is based.

A conditional sentence commonly consists of two clauses:

          The protasis: the conditional, or subordinate, clause,

expressing a supposed or assumed case (if).

          The apodosis: the conclusion, or principal, clause, expressing

what follows if the condition is realized. The truth or fulfillment

of the conclusion depends on the truth or fulfillment of the

conditional clause.1

 

          1 Herbert Weir Smyth, Greek Grammar for Colleges (New York:

American Book Company, 1920), p. 512.

 


                                                                                                              5

                The Construction of Conditional Sentences

The Protasis

          As Smyth stated, the protasis stands as the subordinate or

dependent clause, setting forth the condition. The term protasis comes

from prosta<sij, "lit. stretching forward, that which is put forward

(in logic, a premise).1  While the formal sequence is the standard

"If . . . then," English, as well as Greek, varies the sequence in

usage: "You will receive the reward if you do a good job."

          The form of the protasis in Greek involves a conditional

particle (ei] or e]a<n) and a verb. The various combinations of particles

and verbs will be discussed later. Though the mood of the verb is the

key element in identifying the type of condition, certain constructions

are fairly standard. Again, these will be presented later. This

combination of particles and moods enables Greek to express conditional

thought with a compact precision lacking in English. The thought of

a few Greek words may take a few English sentences to be communicated.

 

The Apodosis

          The main or independent clause in a conditional sentence is

termed the apodosis. This term comes from "a]podo<sij, lit. giving back,

return; i. e. the resuming or answering clause."2  The apodosis may

employ verbs in any tense or mood, and frequently, in the Koine at

 

          1 Smyth, Grammar, p. 512.

          2 Ibid., p. 512.

 


                                                                                                              6

least, uses the particle a@n with moods other than the indicative.1  Taken

together, then, the protasis and apodosis constitute a conditional

sentence.

 

                                The Conditional Particles

          The origin of the Greek conditional particles is as obscure as

their usage is important. Goodwin, one of the leading Classical Greek

grammarians, succinctly states:

          It is impossible to discuss intelligently the origin of the

      conditional sentence until the etymology and original meaning of

      the particles ei], a@n, and ke< are determined. On these questions

      we have as yet little or no real knowledge.2

He then gives a brief summary of what is known about these particles

and concludes:

      But here we are on purely theoretical ground; and we must content

      ourselves practically with the fact, that in the earliest Greek

      known to us ei was fully established in its conditional sense,

      like our if and Latin si.3

 

          1 H. E. Dana and Julius R. Mantey, A Manual Grammar of the

Greek New Testament (New York: The MacMillan Company, 1966), p. 288.

          2 William Watson Goodwin, Syntax of the Mood and Tenses of the

Greek Verb (Boston: Ginn & Company, 1893), p. 142.

          3 Ibid., p. 143.

 


                                                                                                              7

ei]

          Liddell and Scott trace the origin of ei] back to its use in

Homer where it is sometimes replaced by the Doric ai].1  It introduces

either conditional clauses or questions and is regularly used with the

indicative mood.2  Its consistent translation in conditional clauses is

"if." The relationship of this particle, the indicative mood and the

assumed reality of the condition will be discussed later.

 

e]a<n

          Ean is a combination of ei and an, according to Dana and

Mantey.3  Smyth remarks that "The etymology of e]a<n is uncertain:

either from h] + a@n or from ei] + a@n.”4  This particle introduces

conditions in the subjunctive mood, though it is not limited to this

mood:

      The difference between ei] and e]a<n has been considerably lessened

      in Hellenistic as compared with earlier Greek. We have seen that

      e]a<n can even take the indicative; while (as rarely in classical

      Greek) ei] can be found with the subjunctive.5

 

          1 Henry George Liddell and Robert Scott, A Greek-English Lexicon,

Vol. I, edited by Henry Stuart Jones and Roderick McKenzie (Oxford:

At the Clarendon Press, 1951), p. 480. See also William Watson

Goodwin, An Elementary Greek Grammar (Boston: Ginn Brothers, 1872),

p. 263.

          2 Dana and Mantey, Grammar, p. 246.

          3 Ibid., p. 245.

          4 Smyth, Grammar, p. 512.

          5 J. H. Moulton, A Grammar of New Testament Greek, Volume I:

Prolegomena, third edition (Edinburgh: T. & T. Clark, 1908), p. 187.

 


                                                                                                              8

This caution should guard against absolute rules, but the general

principle is that e]a<n utilizes the subjunctive mood while ei] employs

the indicative. Again, the specific implications of this regarding the

assumed reality of the condition will be discussed later.

          These conditional particles are similar to particles of

interjection in Homeric Greek and related languages. N. D. Coleman

suggests that the conditional particles "appear to have been inter-

jections in the first place."1  J. B. Greenough tries to push the

origin of the conditional sentence and its attendant particles back into

the frontiers of the Indo-European linguistic heritage: "We are

naturally led to conclude that this [conditional] construction was in

use more or less in Indo-European times and was received by each of the

languages as a part of the original inheritance."2  Whatever the source

of these particles, conditional sentences were a vital part of the

language of both Classical and Koine Greek and play a vital role in the

Greek New Testament.

 

                     Conditional Sentences in Classical Greek

          Prior to the discovery of the papyri and the comprehension of

their linguistic significance, Biblical Greek was considered to be

 

          1 N. D. Coleman, "Some Noteworthy Uses of ei] in Hellenistic

Greek with a Note on St. Mark viii 12," The Journal of Theological

Studies, 27:1 (April, 1976), p. 159.

          2 James B. Greenough, "On Some Forms of Conditional Sentences

in Latin, Greek and Sanskrit," Transactions of the American Philo-

logical Association, 2:2 (June, 1871), p. 164.

 


                                                                                                              9

a unique species of that language, sometimes referred to as "Holy Ghost

Greek."1  This was, of course, a false position, for the Greek of the

New Testament was simply the language of the common man as found in

"the street and market place."2  This was distinguished from Hellenistic

Greek, a direct descendant of Attic or Classical Greek. While some

New Testament writings show distinct Hellenistic influence, such as

Luke, Acts and Hebrews, others are distinctly Koine. This is not

because the writers, according to Moulton, used Greek "as foreigners,

Aramaic thought underlying Greek expression."3  Rather it is due to

the individual writers using the language closest to them, each reflecting

their own blend of Hebrew and Hellenistic cultures. As the result of

pioneering efforts by men like Adolf Deismann in analyzing the papyri,

"Biblical" Greek became identified as the language of the common man,

the Koine Greek. To be sure, it still reflected the Hebrew idiom of

the authors, but it was Koine none the less. A. T. Robertson sums up

the current understanding of New Testament Greek:

          The Greek of the New Testament that was used with practical

      uniformity over most of the Roman world is called the Common Greek

      or koinh<. Not that it was not good Greek, but rather the Greek

      in common use. There was indeed a literary koinh< [Hellenistic

      Greek] and a vernacular koinh<.  Plutarch is a good specimen of the,

      literary koinh< while the papyri are chiefly in the vernacular koinh<  

      like most of the New Testament.4

 

          1 Dana and Mantey, Grammar, pp. 9-15.

          2 W. White, Jr., "Greek Language," The Zondervan Pictorial  

Encyclopedia of the Bible, 5 vols., Merrill C. Tenney, editor (Grand

Rapids: Zondervan Publishing House, 1977), II, pp. 827-828.

          3 Moulton, Prolegomena, p. 3.

          4 A. T. Robertson, A Short Grammar of the Greek New Testament

(New York: A. C. Armstrong E. Son, 1908), p. 6.

 


                                                                                                              10

The Importance of Classical Greek

          If the Koine of the New Testament is in the mainstream of

linguistic development and expression, does it have any significant

connection with the literary history of the language as a whole, and

with Classical Greek specifically? Yes, answers Robertson:

          This koinh< was itself the heir of the past. The various Greek

       dialects blended on an Attic base. The koinh< was thus richer in

       expression as to words and forms than any of the older dialects.

      Compare the relation of modern English to the various tongues that

      have contributed to its power and expansion. Ionic, Doric, Aeolic,

      North West Greek and other dialects have made some contribution to

      the common result. The use of nominatives in the midst of accusa-

      tives in the Boeotian, for instance, is strangely like the Book of

      Revelation. So the absence of the future participle is like the N.T.1

          This heritage, then, is sufficient justification for beginning

the study of conditional sentences in Classical Greek, the language

of the period from Homer to the Alexandrian conquests (c. 330 B.C.).2

This language constituted the "chief basis of New Testament Greek,"3

thus its handling of conditional sentences has important effects on

the Koine Greek.

 

Suggested Classification Systems

          How, then, did Classical Greek scholars classify conditional

sentences? In general, they seemed to follow one of three systems.

C. D. Chambers outlines them as follows:

 

          1 A. T. Robertson, A Short Grammar, p. 6.

          2 Dana and Mantey, Grammar, p. 6.

          3 Ibid., p. 6.

 


                                                                                                              11

          There are three possible ways of classifying conditional

      sentences, viz. (i) by time, (ii) by fulfillment, (iii) by form.

     The first is the system of Prof. Goodwin, the second is proposed by

     Mr. Donovan . . . and the third that of Mr. Sonnenschein.l

Though the situation is not as absolute as Chambers suggests, his

comments serve as a useful guide to the discussion of conditional

sentences in Classical Greek.

 

Classification According to Time

          The classification most familiar to American students of

Classical Greek is that of William Watson Goodwin. As Professor of

Greek Literature at Harvard University (1860-1901) he exerted signi-

ficant influence on Greek studies in the United States. His first major

book, Syntax of the Moods and Tenses of the Greek Verb, was published in

1860 when he was twenty-nine years of age. Ten years later he published

An Elementary Greek. Grammar.2  The importance of these works may be

judged by the fact that both are still in print. His influence

extended into New Testament studies through the work of Ernest DeWitt

Burton.

          The statement of the system.--Goodwin sets forth his system in

terms of past, present and future conditions:

 

          1 C. D. Chambers, "The Classification of Conditional Sentences,"

The Classical Review, 9:2 (May, 1895), pp. 293-294.

          2 Chalmers G. Davidson, "Goodwin, William Watson," Dictionary

American Biography, Vol. IV, edited by Allen Johnson (New York: Charles

Scribner's Sons, 1957), pp. 411-413.

 

 


                                                                                                              12

          The most obvious natural distinction is that of (a) present

      and past conditions and (b) future conditions. Present and past

      conditions (a) are divided into two classes by distinguishing (1)

      those which imply nothing as to the fulfillment of the condition

     from (2) those which imply that the condition is not or was not

     fulfilled. Future conditions (b) have two classes (1, 2), distin-

     guished by the manner in which the supposition is stated. Class 1

     of present and past conditions is further distinguished on the

     ground of the particular or general character of the supposi-

      tion . . . .1

          Goodwin also includes the concepts of (a) fulfillment or non-

fulfillment and (b) particular and general characteristics as other

features by which conditional sentences may be classified. The first

leads him to identify conditional clauses as (1) those which imply

nothing as to the fulfillment of the condition, (2) those which imply

fulfillment of the condition and (3) those which imply the nonfulfillment

of the condition.

          He explains the particular and general characteristics:

          A particular supposition refers to a definite act or to several

      definite acts, supposed to occur at some definite time (or

      times) . . . .

          A general supposition refers indefinitely to any act or acts

      of a given class which may be supposed to occur or to have

      occurred at any time . . . .2

          The form of the conditional sentence may serve as a guide to

its identification and classification under these headings. A later

edition of his grammar summarizes this:

          I. Present and past suppositions implying nothing as to ful-

               fillment or condition:

                    (a) Chiefly particular:

                              (protasis) ei] with indicative

                              (apodosis) any form of the verb

 

          1 Goodwin, Syntax of Moods, p. 139.

          2 Ibid., p. 141.


                                                                                                              13

          (b)      General:

                    1.  (protasis) e]a<n with subjunctive

                         (apodosis) present indicative

                    2.  (protasis) ei] with the optative

                         (apodosis) imperfect indicative

II.  Present and Past suppositions implying that the condition is

      not fulfilled:

          (protasis) ei] with past tense of indicative

          (apodosis) past tense of indicative with a@n

III. Future suppositions in more vivid form:

          (protasis) ei] with subjunctive (sometimes ei] with future

                    indicative

          (apodosis) any future form

IV.  Future suppositions in less vivid form:

          (protasis) ei] with optative

          (apodosis) optative with a@n1

Smyth also adopts this system of classification.2

          The evaluation of the system.--The first point in evaluating

Goodwin's system is that of time. He seems to make time a basis of

classification when absolute time is of secondary importance in the

Greek verb system. Goodwin himself notes that relative time is far more

prominent in Greek verbs than in English: "It is a special distinction

between the Greek and the English idioms, that the Greek uses its verbal

 

          1 William Watson Goodwin, Greek Grammar, revised by Charles

Burton Gulick (Boston: Ginn and Company, 1930), pp. 295-296.

          2 Smyth, Grammar, pp. 513-516.

 


                                                                                                              14

forms much more freely to denote merely relative time."1 A. T. Robertson,

noting that absolute time is limited to the indicative mood, warns that

"even in the indicative the time element is subordinate to the kind of

action expressed."2  While his reference to "kind" of action may be

questioned, his observation on time is helpful.

          But is Goodwin basing his classification on time as indicated

by the verb itself, or on absolute time as indicated by the sentence as

a whole? The examples he offers as illustrations seem to place the

emphasis upon the verb rather than the syntax. Thus he presents: "Ei]  

pra<ssei tou?to, kalw?j e@xei, if he is doing this, it is well;  ei] pra<ssei

tou?to, h[marthke<n, if he is doing this, he has erred; ei] pra<ssei tou?to,

kalw?j e@cei, if he is doing this, it will be well."3  One may well argue

that the syntax of a verb does assign it absolute time in any given

context. But Goodwin does not stress the role of syntax in establishing

the time of his verb. One must therefore question any system of

classification which makes absolute time as found in the verb itself a

foundation criterion.

          Second, his distinction between particular and general conditions

may be questioned as an objective standard of classification. Goodwin

argues that

 

          1 Goodwin, Syntax of Moods, p. 8.

          2 A. T. Robertson, Grammar, p. 825.

          3 Goodwin, Syntax of Moods, p. 139.

 


                                                                                                              15

          When the apodosis has a verb of present time expressing a

      customary or repeated action, the protasis may refer (in a general

      way) to any act or acts of a given class which may be supposed to

      occur at any time within the period represented in English as

      present. Thus we may say:--

          Ea@n ti<j kle<pth, kola<zetai, if (ever) any one steals, he is

(in all such cases) punished . . . .1

          Goodwin's concept of a present general condition seems to fit

conditional sentences in the New Testament, such as I John 1:7:  e]a<n de>

e]n t&? fwti> peripatw?men. . . , koinwni<an e@xomen - but if (whenever) we

walk in the light . . . we have (in such cases) fellowship. But what

about conditions such as Luke 5:12? Here the apodosis uses a present

tense, but the condition must be considered a particular one, limited

to the historical situation:  ku<rie, e]a<n qe<lhj, du<nasai< me kaqari<sai -

Lord, if you are willing you are able to cleanse me.

          What is the difference between these two sentences? Simply

that the apodosis of I John 1:7 contains a present tense verb which

expresses a "customary or repeated action," while that of Luke 5:12

does not. There can be no question that the condition in I John 1:7

states a general situation that is presently true for all believers,

but such identification depends upon the interpretation of the action

represented by the verb. Could it be possible for interpreters to

disagree over the interpretation of a given verb? Yes, it could.

Should the basis of classification be a point that is interpretative

in nature? It seems reasonable to answer in the negative. Since, then,

there is no objective way of determining if a verb is referring to a

 

          1 Goodwin, Syntax Mood's, p. 141.

 


                                                                                                              16

general or a particular act, the final determination becomes one of

interpretation rather than form. The concept of general versus particular

may serve as an interpretative guideline, but it is not distinguished by

form. "That point [of present or general conditions]," writes A. T.

Robertson ,"has no bearing on the quality of the condition."1  Though

several modern New Testament grammarians continue this terminology,

it must be questioned as a criterion to the objective analysis of

conditional sentences.

          Another point to consider in evaluating Goodwin's classifica-

tion system is his concept of fulfillment or non-fulfillment as found

in the condition. Robertson has particular problems with Goodwin's

concept that conditions employing the indicative mood in the protasis

imply nothing as to the fulfillment of the condition. This, as

Robertson sees it, violates the very nature of the indicative mood:

      The words to which I object, besides "particular," are "implying

      nothing as to the fulfillment of the condition." This condition

      pointedly implies the fulfillment of the condition. It is the

      condition of actuality, reality, Wirklichkeit, and not mere

      "possibility" as Farrar has it . . . a la Goodwin.2

Robertson claims that Goodwin "confuses the 'fact' with the 'statement'

of the fact."3 This seems a bit harsh, for Goodwin himself writes:

"The Greek has no form implying that a condition is or was fulfilled,

and it is hardly conceivable that any language should find such a form

 

          1 Robertson, Grammar, p. 1006.

          2 Ibid., p. 1006.

          3 Ibid.,p. 1006.

 


                                                                                                              17

necessary or useful."1  This would amount to a direct statement, for

if the condition is fulfilled, then the results are realized. Such a

statement would not be a conditional statement at all, but a statement

of actuality. While the specific topic of reality in conditional

sentences will be examined in detail later, the important point is that

Robertson had serious doubts about the validity of Goodwin's classifica-

tion scheme.

          Another minor point of criticism leveled against Goodwin is

that of terminology. J. W. Roberts notes that "Others have attacked

Goodwin's terms 'more' and 'less vivid' as describing the significance

of his third and fourth class conditional sentences," but gives no

supporting references.2  Robertson did not use this terminology, and

those who followed have also set it aside. Some contemporary grammarians,

though, are returning to it. Both Robert W. Funk and William S.

La Sor speak of "vivid" and "less vivid" concepts when discussing

conditional sentences in their grammars. This point is not foundational

to the analysis of Goodwin's system, and will be discussed later.

 

          1 Goodwin, Syntax of Moods, p. 140.

          2 J. W. Roberts, "The Use of Conditional Sentences in the Greek

New Testament as Compared with Homeric, Classical and Hellenistic

Uses," unpublished Ph.D. dissertation, the University of Texas,

1955, p. 20.

          3 Robert W. Funk, A Beginning-Intermediate Grammar of Hellenistic

Greek (Missoula, Montana: The Society of Biblical Literature, 1973),

p. 684; and William Sanford La Sor, Handbook of New Testament Greek,

vol. II (Grand. Rapids: Wm. B. Eerdmans Publishing Company, 1973),

pp. 221-225.

 


                                                                                                              18

          In summary, then, Goodwin is the main proponent of Chamber's

first suggested criterion for classifying conditional sentences: Time.

The main point of Goodwin's system is the classification of these

sentences into past, present and future conditions. Some of these

categories are further divided into "particular" and "general" condi-

tions, and some of these are subdivided by "vividness."

          Criticism of his system has focused on (1) his use of time as

a main dividing point, (2) the characteristics of particular and

general, (3) the implication of fulfillment and (4) his terminology.

The majority of Koine grammarians today, operating under the influence

of A. T. Robertson, do not follow Goodwin's system, though some show

signs of returning to it.

 

Classification According to Fulfillment

          The second criterion suggested by Chambers for classifying

conditional sentences is that of fulfillment, i.e. cataloging them

according to the fulfillment or non-fulfillment of the condition.

          The statement of the system.--Herbert Wier Smyth follows this

system, noting that conditional sentences may be classified according

to form and function. Among the functions he lists is "fulfillment or

non-fulfillment."1  J. Donovan also champions this method of classifica-

tion, and his argument is worth pursuing. He uses a book review essay

as an opportunity to argue his case in The Classical Review. The grammar

 

          1 Smyth, Grammar, p. 514.

 


                                                                                                              19

he is reviewing argues for the position of classification by form, and

Donovan rejects this approach. He argues that different meanings may

have the same form. He concludes by writing: "What is wanted is not that

there should be a search for 'would be' or 'should be' or 'might be'

or other variations; but recourse should at once be had to the universal

canon of fulfillment or non-fulfillment."1

          Further, recognizing that his position had already been

challenged, he adds a note of defense:

      After the campaign recently conducted in the pages of this Review

      against the very principle of fulfillment as a basis of classifica-

      tion, one point is now clear, if it was not so already, namely,

      that to be regarded as unfulfilled, a condition need not necessarily

      be so actually, but that it is enough that it should be assumed

      to be such.2

Thus Donovan elevates the concept of fulfillment or non-fulfillment to

the status of a "universal canon" for the classification of conditional

sentences.

          The evaluation of the system.--Donovan's review brought a rapid

response from Chambers who defended the position in question. His

rebuttal begins with a summary of Donovan's principle:

      Therefore the universal canon resolves itself into this: Conditions

      are to be divided into (i) those which imply or assume without

      implying that the condition is not fulfilled, and (ii) those which

      do not assume or imply that the condition is not fulfilled.3

 

          1 J. Donovan, "Sonnenschein's Greek Grammar," The Classical  

Review, 9:1 (January, 1895), p. 64.

          2 Ibid., p. 64.

          3 Chambers, "Classification," pp. 293-294.

 


                                                                                                              20

He then offers three serious objections to Donovan's position. First,

Chambers observes that this produces an imbalance in grammar. Condi-

tions implying non-fulfillment are relatively rare in the language and

should not be the basis of classification. Second, the terminology is

awkward at best and hardly fits the need of the beginning composition.

Since Chambers is speaking of English to Greek composition, his comment

has little reference to this study. Third, and more to the point,

Donovan's scheme does not fit all cases. The majority of grammarians

have not followed his suggestions. The concept of fulfillment does, as

Goodwin notes, play a role in our understanding of conditional sentences,

but it does not provide a sufficiently applicable standard upon which to

classify them.1

 

Classification by Form

          The third criterion Chambers suggests is classification by the

form of the conditional sentence. Among the classical grammarians who

have followed this approach is E. A. Sonnenschein, professor of Greek

and Latin at Birmingham University.2

 

          The statement of the system.--Sonnenschein writes:

          To me the ordinary forms of Conditional Sentences, whether in

      Latin, Greek or a modern language, present themselves in two great

 

          1 Goodwin, Syntax of Moods, p. 139.

          2 S. B. Sedwick, "Sonnenschein, Edward Adolf," Dictionary of  

National Biography, 1922-1930, edited by J. R. H. Weaver (London:

Oxford University Press, 1961), p. 796.

 


                                                                                                              21

     classes, the distinction between which is marked by certain well-

     defined differences both of meaning and of linguistic form.1

Form, for him, helps determine the meaning, for in his classification

"there is a coincidence between distinctions of form and distinctions of

meaning."2 Chambers supports this principle, noting that "It is

axiomatic that the division by form, and not by sense, is the truly

scientific one, because like forms must (originally at least) have like

meanings, but like meanings need not have like forms."3

          Smyth notes that several possibilities exist with regard to

classification according to form:

          Classified according to form, all conditional sentences may be

          arranged with regard to the form of the protasis or of the apodosis.

          Protasis:  ei] with the indicative.

                    e]a<n (rarely ei]) with the subjunctive.

                    ei] with the optative.

          Apodosis: with a@n, denoting what would (should) be or have been.

                    without a@n, not denoting what would (should) be or

                    have been.4

          Which of these possibilities should be followed if conditional

sentences are to be classified by form? "Ought we to classify according

to the Protasis (Subordinate Clause) or according to the Apodosis

 

          1 E. A. Sonnenschein, "Horton-Smith's Conditional Sentences,"

The Classical. Review, 9:2 (April, 1895), p. 221.

          2 Ibid., p. 221, italics added .

          3 Chambers, "Classification," p. 294.

          4 Smyth, Grammar, p. 513.

 


                                                                                                              22

(Principal Clause), or according to both at once?"1  Sonnenschein opts

for the Apodosis as the standard. Roberts outlines his system so:

          I.  Type One: Sentences without a@n in the apodosis: the protasis

                    expressing no implication of fulfillment.

          ei] with a Past Indicative expressing what was

          ei] with a Present Indicative expressing what is

          e]a<n with a Subjunctive expressing what is or what will be

          Also e]a<n h] e@stai "If A is B," followed by a command or wish.

II.  Type Two: Sentences with ay in the apodosis: the protasis

          expressing some sort of implication as to fact or fulfill-

          ment.

          ei] with the Optative--Optative with a@n expressing what would be

          ei] with a Past Indicative--Past Indicative with a@n expressing

                    what would be

III.      Type Three:  ei] ei@h . . . e@stai (or e@sti) expressing in the

                    protasis some sort of mental reservation.2

          Evaluation of the system.--Donovan, as indicated above, claims

that this system leads to more problems than solutions in application.

Even Chambers wonders "whether this was the original principle of

division, or only its accidental final result."3 The basic problem is

the occasional divergence between form and meaning. Although the use of

form does offer an objective standard of classification, is it reasonable

to pursue it when it does not coincide with the real world? As will be shown

Sonnenschein is on the right track, but the emphasis requires a slight

 

          1 Sonnenschein, "Horton-Smith," p. 220.

          2 Roberts, "Conditional Sentences," p. 12.

          3 Charmers, "Classification," p. 294.

 


                                                                                                              23

shift in order to be workable.

 

Classification by Determination

          Chambers omitted a fourth basis of classification of conditional

sentences, that of determination. This approach, popularized by B. L.

Gildersleeve and followed by many other grammarians, was first published

in 1876 and again in 1882.1  It seems strange that Chambers, writing in

1895, was unaware of it.

          The statement of the system.--Gildersleeve states his case so:

          In common with most grammarians, I divide the conditional

     sentences into four classes, for which I have been in the habit of

     using the designations "Logical," "Anticipatory," "Ideal,"

     "Unreal." If nothing more can be said in behalf of this nomenclature

     than that it saves time, something at least has been said; and I am

     glad to learn that a part of this nomenclature, as applied to the

     Latin language, has found favor among teachers. Logical, Ideal, and

     Unreal conditions occur in Latin also. The Anticipatory is

     peculiar to Greek.2

          He describes the Logical Condition as one that

     . . . states the elements in question. It is used of that which

    can be brought to the standard of fact; but that standard may be

    for or against the truth of the postulate. All that the logical

    condition asserts is the inexorable connexion [sic] of the two

    members of the sentence.3

 

          1 B. L. Gildersleeve, "On ei] with the Future Indicative and ean  

with the Subjunctive in the Tragic Poets," Transactions of the American

Philological Association, 7:1 (January, 1876), pp. 2-23; and “Pindaric

Syntax,” pp. 434-445.

          2 Gildersleeve, "On ei]," pp. 5-6.

.         3 Gildersleeve, "Pindar," p. 435.


                                                                                                              24

This type of condition corresponds to Robertson's First Class condition.1

          The Anticipatory Condition involves e]a<n in the protasis, and thus

corresponds to Robertson's Third Class condition. Interestingly enough,

Gildersleeve agrees with Goodwin in his concept of particular and

general ("generic"), noting that "The anticipatory condition is

particular or generic according to the character of the apodosis . . .,

just as any other conditional sentence."2  The key element is the

use of the present indicative in the apodosis. Such a condition "is

regularly generic."3

          Gildersleeve's Ideal Condition employs the optative mood and

"seems to have been developed out of the wish, just as the anticipatory

was developed out of demand."4 This corresponds to Robertson's Fourth

Class condition. Since the New Testament has no complete sentence of

this type, his comments on it are beside the point of this study.

          His fourth type of condition is termed the Unreal Condition,

corresponding to Robertson's Second Class condition. Rather than use

the term non-fulfillment as does Goodwin, he speaks of it as

"futureless."

      The Unreal. Condition, 'the hypothesis contrary to fact,' seems

      to be related to the hopeless wish, as the ideal condition to the

      wish pure and simple . . . . A wish may be madly impossible, but

 

          1 Robertson, Grammar, p. 1007.

          2 Gildersleeve, "Pindar," p. 436.

          3 Ibid., p. 435.

          4 Ibid., p. 436.

 


                                                                                                    25

     if it belongs to the domain of the future it is optative. Now the

     hopeless wish is hopeless because it is futureless . . . .1

In simple language, this condition states a condition as though there

is no hope whatsoever of its being fulfilled. It implies its non-

fulfillment.

          Thus Gildersleeve divides conditional sentences into two broad

catagories: the first containing those which imply something about the

determination of the condition, and the second containing those which

imply nothing about its determination. The first catagory is subdivided

into two classes: those which imply positive fulfillment of the condi-

tion and those which imply negative or non-fulfillment of the condition.

The second catagory also is subdivided into two classes: those

conditions with a greater degree of probability and those with a

lesser degree of probability.

Roberts summarizes this in outline form:

I.        Condition determined

          A.      As fulfilled - the Simple or Logical Condition

                                                                 past

                    Protasis: ei] with an indicative present

                                                                 future

                    Apodosis: Any form of verb

          B.       As unfulfilled - the Unreal Condition

                    Protasis: ei] with a past indicative

                    Apodosis: Past indicative with a@n

 

          1 Gildersleeve, "Pindar," p. 437.

 


                                                                                                              26

II.  Condition undetermined

          A. With greater prospect of fulfillment - The Anticipatory

               Condition

                    Protasis: e]a<n with the subjunctive

                    Apodosis: Usually future, except for the general, which has

                              the present indicative

          B. With less prospect of fulfillment - The Ideal Condition

                    Protasis: ei] with the optative

                    Apodosis: Optative with a@n1

          The comparison of the system.--A comparison of this outline with

that of Goodwin's system on pages 12-13 or with the chart in Smyth's

grammar will indicate Gildersleeve's points of departure.2  These may

be listed as:

          1. No attempt is made to utilize the time of the condition as a

guide to the classification of the sentence.

          2. No attempt has been made to divide them into particular

or general on the basis of the protasis. Each of these may, in

Gildersleeve's opinion, be particular or general, depending on the

apodosis, but that is not a basis of classification.3

          3. Mood, rather than tense is emphasized as one of the important

features of the protasis.

 

          1 Roberts, "Conditional Sentences," p. 22.

          2 Smyth, Gammar, p. 516.

          3 He does approve of such a distinction as a guide to interpre-

tation. See "On ei]," p. 7.

 


                                                                                                              27

          4. No attempt is made to distinguish general and particular

conditions by form, though he does recognize that the Anticipatory

condition (e]a<n with the subjunctive in the protasis) is more often than

not a general condition.

          5. The Future Condition (called by Smyth the "Future Emotional"1)

is identified as a simple or logical condition on the basis of the

indicative mood.

          This system has been followed by a significant number of Koine

grammarians, including men such as Winer,2 Buttman,3 Robertson,4 and

Blass-Debrunner.5

          The evaluation of the system.--There are three points which need

to be considered in evaluating his system. First, the above-mentioned

 

          1 Smyth, Grammar, p. 516.

          2 G[eorge] Benedict] Winer, A Grammar of the Idiom of the New

Testament, seventh edition, revised by Gottlieb Lunemann, translated

and edited by J. H. Thayer (Andover, Massachusetts: Warren F. Draper,

Publisher, 1893), p. 291.

          3 Alexander Buttmann, A Grammar of the New Testament Greek,

translated and edited by J. H. Thayer (Andover: Warren F. Draper,

Publisher, 1873), p. 220.

          4 Robertson, Grammar, p. 1004.

          5 F[riedrich] Blass and Albert] Debrunner, A Greek Grammar of

the New Testament and Other Early Christian Literature, translated and

revised by Robert W. Funk (Chicago: The University of Chicago Press,

1961), pp. 188-189.

 


                                                                                                              28

point regarding present and general conditions needs to be summarized.

Gildersleeve maintains that any conditional sentence may be particular

or general "according to the character of the apodosis."1  The

particular character he looks for is the use of the present tense. This

is true, according to him, of all conditions, including the Logical and

Anticipatory conditions:

     Hence when [the logical condition] has its apodosis in the present,

     it has a double meaning, which adapts it admirably to personal

     argument. So especially when the form ei] tij is used, which may

     point either to a definite or to an indefinite person, the Logical

     condition is a two-edged sword, often wielded in the keen encounter

     of Attic wit. But as the e]a<n conditional with a present indicative

     apodosis is regularly generic, it is not without reason that this

     form should be preferred, when distinctly generic action is to be

     expressed.2

          New Testament examples which illustrate his point include

Matthew 19:10 (ei] ou!twj e]sti<n h[ ai]ti<a tou? a]nqrw<pou meta> th?j gunaiko<j, ou] sumfe<rei gamh?sai - if this is the case of the man with his wife,

it is better not to marry), a logical condition which is obviously

a general one, and John 11:9 (e]a<n tij peripath? e]n t^? h[me<r%, ou]

prosko<ptei - if anyone walks in the day he does not stumble), an

anticipatory condition which is also general. Whether this holds as

a uniform rule (present tense in apodosis = a general condition)

deserve detailed treatment and will receive it at a later point in

this study. For now, it is sufficient to note that Gildersleeve's

suggestion does fit some passages in the Koine of the New Testament.

 

          1 Gildersleeve, "Pindar," p. 435.

          2 Gildersleeve, "On ei," p. 6.

 


                                                                                                              29

          The second point of evaluation also relates to a distinction

between Gildersleeve and Goodwin. Gildersleeve's system relegates the

present general condition of Goodwin to the anticipatory class because

of its subjunctive mood. Conditions employing future indicative verbs

are classed as simple or logical conditions. But what is the difference

between these two? Does not the future indicative convey the same concept

as the present subjunctive, for all practical purposes?

          Gildersleeve answers that there is a distinction between the

two, one which he feels has been overlooked by many grammarians. First,

he notes, the normal pattern for future conditions is e]a<n with the

subjunctive: "The fact then is patent enough to every one who will be

at pains to count, that for model Greek prose e]a<n with the subjunctive

is preferred to ei] with the future indicative."1 The reason for this,

he writes,

      . . . seems to be to a considerable extent the greater temporal

     exactness, the same greater temporal exactness which has wholly

     displaced the future indicative with the temporal particles, the same

     greater temporal exactness which has given so wide a sweep to the

     optative with a@n as a sharper form of the future.2

          If e]a<n with the subjunctive is the normal form in Attic prose,

what is the role of ei] with the future indicative?  It shows

     . . . a certain coldness, a certain indifference; and this added to

     the general rigor of the logical condition, which faces fact in all

     its grimness, gives a stern, minatory, prophetic tone to the future

 

          1 Gildersleeve, "On ei]," p. 9.

          2 Ibid., p. 9.

 


                                                                                                              30

     indicative, which commentators and grammarians have noticed, but

     noticed only in passing.1

          Though Gildersleeve is speaking of conditions in Attic Greek,

his observations give an added dimension to the force of such conditions

in the New Testament, such as Matthew 6:23 (e]a<n de> o[ o]fqalmo<j sou

ponhro>j h#, o!lon to> sw?ma< sou skoteino>n e@stai - but if your eye is evil,

your whole body will be darkness) and Luke 13:3 (a]lla< e]a<n mh> metanoh?te,

pa<ntej o[moi<wj a]polei?sqe - but unless you repent, you will all likewise

be destroyed).

          Thus Gildersleeve uses the mood of the verb as the guiding

principle of his classification. The present general conditions as

identified by Goodwin simply follow the pattern of Attic prose and should

be considered as a type of anticipatory or future conditions. Further,

the use of the future indicative not only classes the condition as a

logical condition, but stresses the inescapable nature of the apodosis.

          A third point arises over the distinction between the indicative

and subjunctive moods. Contrary to Gildersleeve, Goodwin maintains that

there is no distinction between these two moods in conditional sentences

except that of time. He devotes an entire paper to the defense of his

position and offers the following observation:

          The idea of "possibility" or something of the kind being attached

      to the subjunctive, it was naturally supposed that the simple

     indicative in protasis must have a corresponding idea at its

     foundation, and that of "certainty" or "reality" has generally been

     assigned to it.2

 

          1 Gildersleeve, "On ei]," p. 9.

          2 "William Watson Goodwin, "On the Classification of Conditional

Sentences in Greek Syntax," Transactions of the American Philological  

Association, 6:1 (March, 1873), pp. 61-62.

 


                                                                                                              31

          He then gives several reasons for questioning that this

distinction holds up in conditional sentences. In concluding his

argument he writes:

     After the most careful study that I have been able to give to the

     subject, and especially after a comparison of several thousand

     classic examples, I am convinced that no such principle [of

     distinction] can be found. Every example that I have met with has

     only confirmed the opinion, which I can now express with the

     greatest confidence, that there is no inherent distinction between

     the present indicative and the present subjunctive in protasis

     (between ei] boule<tai and e]a<n boulh?tai) except that of time.1

          Robertson, writing some years later, defends Gildersleeve's

position against Goodwin by pointedly hinging the meaning of the logical

condition (ei] with the indicative in the protasis) on the significance

of the indicative mood.2  This mood, according to him, is characterized

as:

     . . . the "modus rectus." It does express "l'affirmation pure

     et simple." The indicative does state a thing as true, but does not

     guarantee the reality of the thing. In the nature of the case only

     the statement is under discussion. A clear grip on this point will

     help one all along. The indicative has nothing to do with reality

     ("on sich"). The speaker presents something as true. Actuality is

     implied, to be sure, but nothing more. Whether it is true or no is

     another matter.2

          Concerning the subjunctive mood, Robertson notes two things.

First, it is probably impossible to identify a single root-idea for

this mood. He accepts Brugmann's identification of "three uses of the

subjunctive (the volitive, the deliberative, the futuristic."3  Thus

 

          1 Goodwin, "Classification," pp. 64-65.

          2 Robertson, Grammar, p. 915.

          3 Ibid., pp. 926-927.

 


                                                                                                              32

the subjunctive does not necessarily imply a specific time.

          Second, there is a close connection between the aorist sub-

juctive and the future indicative:

      These [the aorist subjunctive and the future indicative] are closely

      allied in form and sense. It is quite probable that the future

      indicative is just a variation of the aorist subjunctive . . . .

      The subjunctive is always future, in subordinate clauses relatively

      future. Hence the two forms continued side by side in the language.

      There is a possible distinction. "The subjunctive differs from the

      future indicative in stating what is thought likely to occur, not

      positively what will occur." [quoting Thompson, A Syntax of Attic

      Greek, p. 133].1

          Thus Robertson offers support for Gildersleeve's position by

holding, first, to a uniform distinction between indicative and sub-

junctive moods, and, second, to a non-chronological significance for

the subjunctive mood itself. The particular case of the future

indicative and the aorist subjunctive may show a blurring of this

otherwise sharp distinction, but Robertson will not concede confusion

in the essential modal significance, even in conditional sentences.

          It would seem, then, that the major objections against

Gildersleeve's system raised by Goodwin can be answered. Indeed, some

of the answers are directly related to the objections raised against

Goodwin's own approach. Most Koine grammarians have been convinced of

the superiority of Gildersleeve's approach and have adopted it, via

Robertson, with some notable exceptions.

 

          1 Robertson, Grammar, pp. 924-925.

 


                                                                                                              33

Summary of Classical Greek Classification Systems

          This somewhat detailed review of the work of Classical gram-

marians has shown that there is, in truth, significant disagreement

among them. Goodwin classifies according to time, Donovan according to

fulfillment or, non-fulfillment, Sonnenschein and Chambers according to

form, and Gildersleeve according to determination. In terms of a

majority vote, classical grammarians usually follow Goodwin and Koine

grammarians generally follow Gildersleeve (or Robertson who follows

Gildersleeve).

 

                        Conditional Sentences in Koine Greek

          It is impossible to separate the advances in Koine grammar

from those of Classical Greek, for they have moved hand-in-hand. At

times, Koine grammarians took the work of the Classical scholars and

brought it directly into New Testament studies, as Burton did with

Goodwin's classification of conditional sentences. Robertson is

representative of those Koine scholars who were conversant with Classical

studies, but saw fit to reject some of them and sharpen the focus of

others, as he did with Gildersleeve's work on these sentences.

          Nigel Turner has done the historian of grammatical studies a

great favor by publishing a chronological bibliography of all major

Greek works, beginning with the first New Testament grammar published

in 1655 and ending with the latest edition of Bauer's Worterbuch in

1958.1

 

          1 Nigel Turner, A Grammar of New Testament Greek. Volume III:

Syntax (Edinburgh: T. & T. Clark, 1963), pp. vii-x.

 


                                                                                                              34     

          This discussion will limit itself to the major Koine grammarians

appearing on his list, including those who have published since he

compiled his catalog. For organizational purposes they will be divided

into "Early" and "Late" grammarians, with A. T. Robertson being the

dividing point. Just as the survey of Classical grammarians illustrated

the wide range of opinion on conditional sentences in the classic

writings, so this survey will demonstrate that Koine studies are in a

similar state of flux.

 

                              Early Grammarians

George Benedict Winer

          George Benedict Winer is identified by Dana and Mantey as the

first grammarian to operate with the concept that the Greek of the New

Testament is the Greek of the common people, not a special, Holy Ghost

language.1  In the preface to the Sixth Edition of his grammar Winer

writes:

          The fundamental error--the prw?ton yeu?doj--of the Biblical

     philology and exegesis to which we refer, consisted ultimately in

     this, that neither the Hebrew nor the language of the N.T. was

     regarded as a living idiom . . . designed to be used by men as the

     medium of intercourse.2

From this basis he develops his analysis of the Koine grammar, including

that of conditional sentences.

 

          1 Dana and Mantey, Grammar, p. 9.

          2 Winer, Grammar, p. v.

 


                                                                                                              35

Statement of His Position

          Winer applies the results of the "enlightened philology" of his

day to New Testament Greek and offers this analysis of conditional or

hypothetical sentences:

          In HYPOTHETICAL sentences four kinds of construction occur:

          a. Pure condition: If thy friend come, give him my regards  

     (the case is put as real). Here the Indicative is used with

      ei]. . . .

          b. Condition with assumption of objective possibility (where

      experience will decide whether or not it is real): If thy friend

      should come  (I do not know whether he will come, but the result

      will show). Here e]a<n . . . with the Subjunctive is used.

          c. Condition with assumption of subjective possibility, the

      condition existing merely in thought:  If thy friend come (the case

      being conceivable and credible) I should be pleased to present my

      respects to him. Here ei] with the Optative is used.

          d. Condition believed to be contrary to the fact: were there a

     God, he would govern (but there is not). Had God existed from

      eternity, he would have prevented evil (but he has not existed).

      Here ei] with the Indicative is used,--the Imperf. in the first case,

      the Aor. or (much more rarely) the Plup. in the second . . .; in the

      conclusion likewise one of these two tenses.1

 

Summary of His Position

          Winer's optimistic statement that "the diction of the N.T. will

be found entirely in accordance with the preceding rules" indicates his

confidence in these four basic divisions.2 Though this has not been

fulfilled to the degree he predicted, Winer has anticipated the major

system used by Koine grammarians today. It is apparent that he is

following Gildersleeve's system, though using slightly different termin-

ology. He makes no reference to Gildersleeve, but it is possible that he

 

          1 Winer, Grammar, p. 291.

          2 Ibid., p. 292

 


                                                                                                              36

was familiar with Gildersleeve's work. Like him, Winer distinguishes

between ei] and the future indicative verb in the protasis and e]]a<n with

the subjunctive, though he acknowledges that "such construction with the

Fut. would approximate most nearly to that with e]a<n . . . ."1  He

illustrates the difference between the two in this way:

      . . . but if all shall be offended in thee is a more decided

     statement than if all should be offended. In the latter, it is

     still altogether uncertain whether they will be offended; in the

     former, this is assumed as a future fact . . . .2

          Winer notes that "the exceptions to these rules in the N.T.

text are but very few, and occur for the most part only in particular

Codd."3  He discusses two types of exceptions: the use of ei] with the

subjunctive and e]a<n with the indicative. He does not discuss mixed

conditions, concessive particles or elliptical conditions.

 

Evaluation of His Position

          It is difficult at best to read many last-century grammarians

with any degree of comprehension. They wrote "for another eye, another

mind and another time." He further complicates the issue by trying to

illustrate Greek concepts from English. The difference between "If thy

friend come" and "If thy friend should come" hardly conveys the

difference between the indicative and subjunctive moods. His

explanatory comments are far more helpful than his examples, which tend

to confuse the points he tries to make.

 

          1 Winer, Grammar, p. 293.

          2  Ibid., p. 294.

 


                                                                                                              37

          Winer did, however, establish a significant precedent by

considering the Koine Greek to be just that, the language of the common

man. By bringing the concept of simple observation and induction to

bear upon the New Testament he advanced the understanding of its

structure and pointed the way for others to follow.

 

Alexander Buttmann

          Alexander Buttmann followed the general rules of Winer in his

treatment of conditional sentences. Rather than expanding the rules at

length, Buttmann concentrated on the deviations found in the New Testa-

ment. By this time it was fairly evident that Winer's confident asser-

tion that all New Testament forms were covered by his four rules was

overstated. Buttmann's work, though, shows that Winer's four classifica-

tions are generally true and accurately describe the majority of

conditional sentences in the New Testament.

 

Statement of His Position

          Buttmann observed that the first two forms of conditional

sentences (ei] with the indicative and e]a<n with the subjunctive) are by

far the most frequent forms in the New Testament.1  He also stressed the

importance of mood as the determining factor in evaluating the kind of

condition:

      The difference between them [the two types of conditional

      sentences] . . . is plainly to be recognized in sentences where

      both are used in close proximity; as Gal. i. 8,9, where the

 

          1 Buttmann, Grammar, p. 220.

 


                                                                                                              38

      hypothesis expressed in the 8th verse by e]a<n with the Subjunctive

      is resumed or repeated in the 9th verse with greater energy and

      definiteness by ei] with the Indicative. So in Acts v. 38, 39.1

Comparison of His Position

          Buttmann's analysis of the exceptions to Winer's rules centers

on two areas: the use of ei] and e][a<n with the indicative and subjunctive

moods respectively, and the use of a@n in conditions contrary to fact.

          Particles and moods.--His analysis of the particles and their

corresponding moods is one of the first treatments of the topic that

discusses the problem of variant readings.

     Of the first case, the use of ei] with the Subjunctive, we find, to

     be sure, accidentally . . . no example which is quite certain; for

     in some of them the readings vary, some are set aside by the MSS.

     (as Rev. xi. 5 [but cod. Sin. qelh?sh the second time]), some are

     capable of a special interpretation.2

He also lists I Corinthians 9:11 and Luke 9:13 as possible examples of

this exception.

          Regarding the use of  e]a<n with the indicative he notes that this

"is given so frequently, that it is to be eliminated as little from the

writings of the N.T. as of the Old."3  Buttmann does concede that most of

these examples may be questioned upon textual evidence, but argues

that the variants were introduced when the copyists altered the original

and more difficult indicative.

 

          1 Buttmann, Grammar, p. 220.

          2 Ibid., p. 221.

          3 Ibid., p. 222.

 


                                                                                                              39

          It is, indeed, not to be denied that the instances in question

      almost disappear amid the multitude of those that are grammatically

      regular, and suspicion may also be raised by the circumstance that

      hardly a single passage with the Indicative is completely beyond

      question critically. Yet when we consider that in countless

      passages with the Subjunctive not the smallest variation is found

      (which would not be the case if the Indicative were chargeable solely

      to the copyists), it is far more probable that, where a diversity of

      readings occurs in such a number of instances, this fact results

     from the circumstance that the copyists, commentators, etc., early

     altered the Indicative which gave them offence.1

Specific examples will be considered in a later section of this study,

but Buttmann's consideration of variant readings marks a significant

advance in the detailed study of conditional sentences.

          Conditions contrary to fact.--The second area of deviation

Buttmann examined was the use of a@n in the fourth class of conditions:

conditions contrary to fact. He noted that the apodosis regularly

included a@n, but recognized that this was not an absolute principle.

He listed four rules to explain the disappearance of a@n from these

apodoses:

          a) When a@n has already been expressed previously in the same

      connection with another predicate. This instance, which often occurs

      in the classics and is found in the nature of the case, is acci-

      dentally not to be met with in the text of the N. T. . . .

          b) When the predicate (or the copula) to which it belongs is

      also dropped, as I Cor. xii. 19 . . . .

          c) Where the apodosis contains such a predicative term as e]dei>,

      kalo<n h#n, h]du<nato, etc. This omission . . . is so necessary

     according to Greek habits of thought, that it is only by way of

     concession to our usage that we can speak of supplying a@n.

          d) Lastly, a@n is dropped for rhetorical reasons: where,

      though the fact itself is impossible or improbable, the orator in

      the vivacity of his thought desires to represent it as actually

 

          1 Buttmann, Grammar, p. 222.

 


                                                                                                              40

having occurred, or at least as almost taken place.1

          Most modern grammarians dispense with these rules, simply

noting that a@n usage is at best unpredictable. Robertson, for example,

simply states that "There is no principle involved in a@n, simply custom."2

Buttmann was willing to recognize that the particle may be absent from a

condition without upsetting the force of that sentence, and this is the

emphasis of modern grammars.

 

Evaluation of His Position

          Buttmann gets credit for a more thorough study of the conditional

sentence than that of Winer. He accepted Winer's four categories, but

noted several major exceptions to them, especially in the variant

readings. Buttmann and Winer both placed emphasis upon mood as the

determining factor in classifying conditional sentences rather than the

particles or tense. It remained for other grammarians to state this

principle in more formal terms.

 

Samuel G. Green

          Published around 1887, Samuel G. Green's Handbook of the Greek

Testament presents an analysis of conditional sentences that follows the

patterns of Winer and Buttmann.3

 

          1 Buttmann, Grammar, pp. 225-226.

          2 Robertson, Grammar. p. 1007.

          3 Samuel G. Green, Handbook to the Grammar of the Greek Testament

(London: The Religious Tract Society, 11886]), pp. 317-320.


                                                                                                              41

Statement of His Position

          Briefly, Green identifies four kinds of conditions or hypotheses:

      a. The supposition of a fact.

       b.                    of a possibility.

       g.                      of uncertainty.

       d.                     of something unfulfilled.1

These four types of conditions are indicated by four distinct

forms:

          a. The conditional particle ei], if, with the Indicative in the

     protasis, assumes the hypothesis as a fact. The apodosis may have

     the Indicative or Imperative.

          b. Possibility or uncertainty with the prospect of decision, is

      expressed by e]a<n = ei] a@n (very rarely by ei] alone [He lists I Cor. 14:5,

      Phil. 3:12, and a few various readings, such as in Rev. 11:5, as

      examples.] with the Subjunctive in the conditional clause, and the

      Indicative or Imperative in the apodosis.

          g. The Optative in a conditional sentence expresses entire

      uncertainty--a supposed case. Here the particle ei] is always used.

          d. When the condition is spoken of as unfulfilled, the

       Indicative is used in both clauses, with the particle ei] in the

       protasis, and a@n in the apodosis.2

Evaluation of His Position

          As is evident, Green's system of analysis is the same as those

already discussed: four types of condition, each identified by a

particular combination of particles and moods, and each conveying a

different concept. Winer, Buttmann and Green all seek to analyze

conditional sentences in terms of form, especially that of mood. They

differ little from the popular scheme of Robertson.

 

          1 Green, Grammar, p. 317.

          2 Ibid., pp. 317-319.

 


                                                                                                              42

Ernest DeWitt Burton

          Ernest DeWitt Burton was both a scholar and an administrator,

having served as the chairman of the Department of New Testament and

Early Christian Literature and later as the president of the University

of Chicago.1  In his major Greek work, Moods and Tenses of New Testament

Greek, he adopts Goodwin's analysis of conditional sentences and applies

it to the New Testament.2

 

Statement of His Position

          His specific position, following Goodwin, is:

          A. Simple Present or Past Particular Supposition. The protasis

     simply states a supposition which refers to a particular case in

     the present or past, implying nothing as to its fulfillment. The

     protasis is expressed by ei] with a present or past tense of the

     Indicative; any form of the finite verb may stand in the apodosis.

 

     John 15:20; ei] e]me> e]di<wcan, kai> u[ma?j diw<cousin, if they have persecuted

          me, they,will also persecute you.

     Gal. 5:18; ei] de> pneu<mati a@gesqe, ou]k e]ste> u[po> no<mon, but if ye are

          led by the Spirit, ye are not under the law. See also Matt. 4:3;

     Luke 16:11; Acts 5:39; Rom. 4:2; 8:10; Gal. 2:17; Rev. 20:15.

          B. Supposition Contrary to Fact. The protasis states a supposi-

      tion which refers to the present or past, implying that it is not or

      was not fulfilled.

          The protasis is expressed by ei] with a past tense of the

     Indicative; the apodosis by a past tense of the Indicative with an.

     John 11:21; Ku<rie, ei] h#j w$de ou]k a@n a]pe<qanen o[ a]delfo<j mou, Lord, if

          thou hadst been here, my brother would not have died.

     Gal. 1:10;  ei] e@ti a]nqrw<poij h@reskon, Xristou? dou?loj ou]k a@n h@mhn, if I

          were still pleasing men, I should not be a servant of Christ.

          See also John 14:28; Acts 18:14; Heb. 4:8; 11:15.

 

          1 Charles Thwing, "Burton, Ernest DeWitt," in Vol. II of

Dictionary of American Biography, ed. by Allen Johnson and Dumas Malone

(New York: Charles Scribner's Sons, 1958), pp. 341-342.

          2 Ernest DeWitt Burton, Syntax of Moods and Tenses in New Testament

Greek (Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1897), p. 101.

 


                                                                                                              43

          C. Future Supposition with More Probability. The protasis

      states a supposition which refers to the future, suggesting some

      probability of its fulfillment.

          The protasis is usually expressed by e]a<n (or a@n) with the

      Subjunctive; the apodosis by the Future Indicative or by some other

      form referring to future time.

      Matt. 9:21; e]a<n mo<non a!ywmai tou? i[mati<ou a]tou? swqh<somai, if I shall

          but touch his garments, I shall be made whole.

      John 12:26; e]a<n tij e]moi> diakonh? timh<sei au]to>n o[ path<r, if any man

          serve me, him will the Father honor.

     John 14:15; e[a<n a]gapa?te< me,  ta>j e]ntola>j ta>j e]ma>j thrh<sete, if ye

          love me, ye will keep my commandments. See also Matt. 5:20;

          I Cor. 4:19; Gal. 5:2; Jas. 2:15,16.

 

          D. Future Supposition with Less Probability. The protasis

      states a supposition which refers to the future, suggesting less

      probability of its fulfillment than is suggested by e]a<n with the

      Subjunctive. There is no perfect example of this form in the New

      Testament.

          The protasis is expressed by ei] with the Optative; the apodosis by

       the Optative with a@n.

      I Pet. 3:17; krei?tton ga>r a]gaqopoiou?ntaj, ei] qe<loi to> qe<lhma tou?

         qeou?, pa<sxein h@ kakopoiou?ntaj, for it is better, if the will of

          God should so will, that ye suffer for well doing than for evil

          doing. See also I Cor. 14:10; 15:37; I Pet. 3:14.

          E. Present General Supposition. The supposition refers to any

     occurrence of an act of a certain class in the (general) present,

     and the apodosis states what is wont to take place in any instance

     of an act of the class referred to in the protasis.

          The protasis is expressed by e]a<n with the Subjunctive, the

     apodosis by the Present Indicative.

     John 11:9; ea]<n tij peripath? e]n t^? h[me<r%, ou] prosko<ptei, if a man

          walk in the day, he stumbleth not.

     2 Tim. 2:5; e]a<n de> kai< a]qlh? tij, ou] stefanou?tai e]a<n mh> nomi<mwj

         a]qlh<sh, and if also a man contend in the games, he is not

          crowned, unless he contend lawfully. See also Mark 3:24; John

          7:51; 12:24; I Cor. 7:39, 40.

          F. Past General Supposition. The supposition refers to any

      past occurrence of an act of a certain class, and the apodosis

      states what was wont to take place in any instance of an act of the

      class referred to in the protasis.

          The protasis is expressed by ei] with the Optative, the apodosis

     by the Imperfect Indicative.

 

                                                                                                    44

          There is apparently no instance of this form in the New Testa-

     ment.1

          In addition to these general classifications, Burton makes some

interesting observations regarding the specific classes. He notes that

in the first type

     . . . the Future Indicative may stand in the protasis of a conditional

     sentence of the first class when reference is had to a present

     necessity or intention, or when the writer desires to state not what

     will take place on the fulfillment of a future possibility, but merely

     to affirm a necessary logical consequence of a future event.2

This differs from Goodwin's position that the future indicative and the

subjunctive may have the same significance in conditional sentences.

          The third class of conditional sentences may also have these

constructions in the protasis: (a) ei] with the Subjunctive, (b) ei] or

e]a<n with the Future Indicative, and (c) ei] with the Present Indicative.3

Conditions of this last form are apparently first class conditions, but

"are distinguished by evident reference of the protasis to the future."4

          Concerning the fifth class, the Present General Supposition, he

notes that some conditions using ei] with the indicative "apparently

express a present general supposition," which does not fit his rule that

such conditions use e]a<n with the subjunctive.5  He explains that it is

 

          1 Burton, Syntax, pp. 102-106.

          2 Ibid., p. 103.

          3 Ibid.,  pp. 104-105.

          4 Ibid., p. 105.

          5 Ibid., p. 107.

 


                                                                                                              45

difficult to distinguish between this form of a present general condition

and that of a simple condition:

      Yet in most New Testament passages of this kind, it is possible that

      a particular imagined instance in the present or future is before the

      mind as an illustration of the general class of cases . . . . It is

      scarcely possible to decide in each case whether the supposition was

      conceived of as general or particular

      Luke 14:26; ei@ tij e@rxetai pro<j me kai> ou] misei? . . . th>n yuxh>n

         e[autou?, ou] du<natai ei#nai< mou maqhth<j, if any man cometh unto

          me, and hateth not . . . his own life, he cannot be my disciple.

          Cf. John 1:51; 12:26; where in protases of apparently similar

          force e]a<n with the Subjunctive occurs, and the apodosis refers to

          the future.

      Rom. 8:25; ei] de> o! ou] ble<pomen e]lpi<zomen, di ] u[pomonh?j a]pekdexo<meqa,

          but if we hope for that which we see not, then do we with

          patience wait for it. See also Jas. 1:26.1

According to form, such conditions are simple conditions, but according

to interpretation, they may be considered a variety of present general

conditions. The distinction, it must be stressed, is one of interpreta-

tion, not form. Classification should be on an objective basis, such

as form, not upon a subjective one, such as interpretation.

 

Summary of His Position

          In addition to these details, Burton also considers many various

peculiarities of conditional sentences. He lists nine of these, including

(1) mixed forms, (2) multiple protases, each with its unique emphasis,

(3) the use of a participle, an imperative or other form of expression

"suggesting a supposition" to supply the protasis, and (4) the observation

that sometimes either the protasis or the apodosis may be omitted.2

 

          1 Burton, Syntax, pp. 107-108.

          2 Ibid., pp. 109-112.

 


                                                                                                              46

          One final comment: Burton correctly identifies the assumption

of "reality" or "unreality" in these conditions as that of the speaker or

his hearers, not in the external situation:

          It should be observed that the titles of the several classes

      of conditional sentences describe the supposition not from the

      point of view of fact, but from that of the representation of the

      case to the speaker's own mind or to that of his hearers.1

Conditional sentences do speak of many things that are objectively true,

but the demonstration of their factuality lies in the external world,

not in the internal world of the conditional statement.

 

James Hope Moulton

          The Prolegomena to James Hope Moulton's A Grammar of the New

Testament was the first major grammar to utilize the newly discovered

evidence from the papyri.2  This work was followed by his Introduction to

the Study of New Testament Greek, a formal grammar.3  Moulton had

originally conceived of his major work, A Grammar of the New Testament,

in terms of three volumes. He published Volume I: Prolegomena in 1906,

and it quickly went through three editions in two years. He produced

the rough draft for parts I and II of the second volume, but was not

permitted to finish it. While at sea he died "in the Mediterranean,

 

          1 Burton, Syntax, p. 101.

          2 James Hope Moulton, A Grammar of New Testament Greek. Volume I:

Prolegomena, third edition (Edinburgh: T. S T. Clark, 1908), p. 4.

          3 James Hope Moulton, An Introduction to the Study of New Testa-

ment Greek (London: Charles H. Kelly, n.d.).

 


                                                                                                              47

in April, 1917, a victim of the ruthless submarine campaign."1 Nigel Turner

continues the interesting story:

     His pupil, Dr. W. F. Howard, saw that volume through the press in

     parts, from 1919 to 1929, but before he had opportunity to lay many

     plans for Volume III he himself died in 1952; and then, on condition

     that he had the assistance of someone who would collect the necessary

     material, Dr. H. G. Meecham assumed responsibility for the syntax.

     It was on Dr. G. D. Kilpatrick's suggestion that I was permitted to

     help at this point, and we had done no more than compile a provisional

     bibliography when Dr. Meecham died in 1955. By the kind invitation of

     the publishers I then worked alone and broke the spell by living to

     complete Volume III.2

          Since he was anticipating two more volumes, Dr. Moulton did little

more than mention a few aspects of conditional sentences in the Prolegomena.

Fortunately, his Introduction to the Study of New Testament Greek gives

a relatively complete presentation of his views on the classification of

these clauses.

 

Statement of His Position

          First, the general comments from his Prolegomena will be

presented. To begin with, he notes that the distinction between ei] and e]a<n

     . . . has been considerably lessened in Hellenistic as compared with

     earlier Greek. We have seen that e]a<n can take the indicative; while

     (as rarely in classical Greek) ei] can be found with the subjunctive.3

          Regarding the constructional distinctions of conditional sentences,

Moulton makes the following observations:

 

          1 James Hope Moulton and W. F. Howard, A Grammar of New Testament

Greek. Volume II: Accidence and Word Formation (Edinburgh: T. & T. Clark,

1929), p. v.

          2 Nigel Turner, A Grammar of New Testament Greek. Volume III:

Syntax (Edinburgh: T. & T. Clark, 1963), p. v.

          3 Moulton, Prolegomena, p. 187.

 


                                                                                                    48

     The differentation of construction remains at present stereotyped:

     ei] goes with indicative, is used exclusively when past tenses come

     in (e.g. Mk 326), and uses ou] as its negative; while e]a<n, retaining

     mh< exclusively, takes the subjunctive almost invariably, unless the

     practically synonymous future indicative is used.  Ea@n and ei] are both

     used, however, to express future conditions .         . . The immense

     majority of conditional sentences in the NT belong to these heads.1

          Moulton opts for Blass's principle as opposed to Goodwin's to

explain the use of the optative mood in these sentences:

          Meanwhile we may observe that Blass's dictum (p. 213) that

      ei] c. opt. form is used "if I wish to represent anything as generally

      possible, without regard to the general or actual situation at the

      moment," suits the NT exx. well; and it seems to fit the general

      facts better than Goodwin's doctrine of a "less vivid future"

      condition (Goodwin, Greek Grammar, 301).2

He specifically identifies Acts 8:31 as an example of a conditional

sentence employing a@n with the optative to which Goodwin's "less vivid"

form does not apply. 3

          However, he does follow Goodwin's general system for the overall

classification of conditional sentences. Three general classes are

recognized:

      Simple Conditions in present or past time.

      Protasis, ei] with indicative; Apodosis, generally indicative, always

          without a]n.

These sentences merely join together a condition and a result without

any indication as to the probability or improbability of the condition.

 

          1 Moulton, Prolegomena, p. 187.

          2 Ibid., p. 196, note.

          3 Ibid., pp. 198-199.

          4 Ibid., p. 199.

 


                                                                                                              49

      Unfulfilled Conditions in present and past time.

      Protasis, ei] with indicative, imperfect for present time, aorist for

      past.

      Apodosis, indicative with a@n, imperfect for present time, aorist for

      past.

      Future Conditions.

      Protasis, e]a<n with subjunctive (rarely indicative, or ei] with subjunc-

       tive).

      Apodosis, future indicative, sometimes the imperative.1

          He classifies the optative condition, Robertson's Fourth Class

Condition, as a special form of the Future Condition, noting that its

full expression has vanished in the Koine and only parts of such conditions

appear in the New Testament.

 

                                           Modern Grammarians

Archibald Thomas Robertson

          Of all modern Koine grammarians, none has exerted the influence or

achieved the status of Archibald Thomas Robertson. As professor of New

Testament at the Southern Baptist Theological Seminary from 1890 to

1934 he helped form modern opinion about Koine Greek. With few exceptions

contemporary grammarians have adopted his terminology and viewpoint,

especially on conditional sentences. Thus his position requires detailed

study in order to fully comprehend the current majority view of

conditional sentences in the New Testament.

 

Statement of His Position

          His system of analysis basically follows that of Gildersleeve

in Classical Greek by identifying four types of conditions, each

 

          1 Moulton, Introduction to New Testament Greek, pp. 210-213.

 


                                                                                                              50

determined by the mood of the protasis.

          His summary.--Robertson first summarizes the importance of mood

in conditions:

      The indicative mode in the condition always makes a clear-cut

      assertion one way or the other [fulfilled or unfulfilled]. If the

      subjunctive or the optative is used in the condition (protasis) a

      doubtful statement is made whatever may be the actual fact or truth

      in the case. By these modes of doubtful statement the condition

      puts it as doubtful or undetermined (not put in a clear--cut way).

      If the subjunctive is used, there is less doubt than if the optative

      is used, precisely the difference between these two modes of doubtful

      statement.1

          This distinction in mood (indicative = fulfilled or unfulfilled,

subjunctive = doubt, optative = more doubt) leads to the natural

conclusion that there are four types of conditional sentences:

          (a) First Class: Determined as Fulfilled (ei], sometimes e]a<n,

     with any tense of the indicative in condition. Any tense of the

      indicative in the conclusion).

          (b) Second Class: Determined as Unfulfilled (ei] and only past

     tenses of the indicative in condition. Only past tenses in the

     conclusion, usually with a@n to make clear the kind of condition

     used).

          (c) Third Class: Undetermined with Prospect of Determination

      (e]a<n or ei] with the subjunctive in the condition, usually future

      or present indicative or imperative in the conclusion, much variety

      in the form of the conclusion).

          (d) Fourth Class: Undetermined with Remote Prospect

     Determination (ei] with the optative in the condition, a@n and the

     optative in the conclusion).2

 

          1 A. T. Robertson and W. Hersey Davis, A New Short Grammar of

the Greek Testament (New York: Harper & Brothers, 1933), p. 349.

          2 Ibid., pp. 349-350.

 


                                                                                                              51

          His Defence.--In defending this analysis, Robertson speaks

against the popular forms of classification, especially that of Goodwin.

First he rejects the concept of particular and general as a basic

principle of classification. Actually the concept of time was the key

principle of Goodwin, but the particular-general division was important.

In any event, Robertson points to the work of Gildersleeve and says of

Goodwin's distinction: "This is a false step in itself."1  He accepts

Gildersleeve's position that any condition may be particular or general,

depending upon the type of verb used in the protasis.

          Robertson then raises his next and most serious objection to

Goodwin and those following him: they refuse to recognize the basic

significance of the mood in conditions. Goodwin's first class of

conditions utilizes the indicative mood and, he says, "simply states a

present or past particular supposition, implying nothing as to the

fulfillment of the condition . . . .2  Robertson strongly objects to

this interpretation, claiming that "This condition pointedly implies the

fulfillment of the condition."3  Robertson hinges his argument on the

basic significance of the indicative mood which, he claims, has its usual

meaning in conditions as well as normal clauses. This is, as he says,

"the crux of the whole matter."4 Goodwin's classification seems to

 

          1 Robertson, Grammar, p. 1005.

          2 Goodwin, Moods and Tenses, p. 145.

          3 Robertson, Grammar, p. 1006.

          4 Ibid., p. 1006.


                                                                                                    51

place emphasis on things other than mood, relegating it to a position

of lesser importance. For Robertson, mood is all-important. He

pursues his analysis on this assumption.

          One specific detail of his system needs further comment: the

first class condition labeled as "Determined as Fulfilled." Robertson

quotes Gildersleeve as identifying this condition as "the favorite

condition," though he is talking about classical poets, especially

Pindar.1  The question already raised by Robertson relates to the

degree of determination implied by the condition. Is the speaker

presenting the condition as something that is objectively true

(ei@ tij qe<lei o]pi<sw mou e@rxesqai, a]rnhsa<sqw e[auto<n - Since someone

does wish to come after me, let him deny himself. Luke 9:23)?  Or is the

speaker assuming the truth of the condition without committing himself

to a position one way or the other, such as might be done "for the

sake of the argument" (ei] de> a]na<stasij nekrw?n ou]k e@stin, ou]de> Xristo>j

e]gh>gertai - But if there is no resurrection of the dead, then Christ

is not raised. I Cor. 15:13)? This point will receive a more detailed

treatment later, but it is important to note that some commentators

have understood Robertson to say that the first class condition actually

affirms the objective reality of the condition. Perhaps his statements

could have been more precise, but common sense will suffice to show

that this cannot be the case in all situations. If it were, then

Christ would have been operating in the power of the Devil (Matt. 12:27)

 

          1 Robertson, Grammar, p. 1007.


                                                                                                              53

and would not be resurrected (I Cor. 15:13). Yet writers continue to

to read objective reality into the first class condition. An extreme

example is the statement of Jerome Moore:

          The first class condition implies truth or reality. If . . .

      and it is true. Colossians 1:23 . . . is an example of this. The

      idea there is, "If ye continue in the faith grounded and settled,

      and ye shall!"  There is no doubt implied here. This is a condition

      of reality. No need to doubt the security of your salvation or any-

      one else's, for if here in the Greek does not imply doubt.1

          Were the situation not so serious, it would be funny.  No

one can guarantee the salvation of anyone else. Certainly Paul

challenged the Corinthians to test and examine themselves (2 Cor. 13:5).

Obviously some contexts permit the English "since" with its implication

of objective reality, but many, indeed, a majority, do not. To make

such claims is to ignore common sense, the teaching of Robertson and

the clear statements of Scripture.

          In his doctoral dissertation John Battle describes Robertson

as "difficult to read."2  Perhaps the wordiness of his Historical

Grammar led to some contradictory statements in the minds of some, but

in the first edition of his Shorter Grammar, he clearly states:

     This condition does assume the reality of the condition. Take

     Matt. 12:27. Christ did not cast out demons by Beelzebub, but

     in argument he assumes it. The indicative mode determines the

     condition as fulfilled, so far as the statement is concerned.3

 

          1 Jerome Moore, "Four Ways to Say 'If,'" The Baptist Bulletin

45:1 (June, 1979), p. 11.

          2 John A. Battle, Jr., "The Present Indicative in New Testament

Exegesis," unpublished Th.D. dissertation, Grace Theological Seminary,

1975, D. 170.

          3 A. T. Robertson, A Short Grammar of the Greek New Testament

(New York: A. C. Armstrong & Son, 1908), p. 151.


                                                                                                              54

At times this assumption is parallel with the objective reality of

the statement, as in I Thessalonians 4:14 – ei] ga>r pisteu<omen o!ti

]Ihsouj a]pe<qanen kai> a]ne<sth . . . ; for if we believe that Jesus died and

rose again. In other contexts the assumption is counter to the

objective reality, as in Matthew 12:27 – kai> ei] e]gw> e]n Beezebou>l

e]kba<llw ta> daimo<nia . . . ; and if I by the power of Beelzebub cast out

the demons. In still other situations (probably the majority of those

in the New Testament) the assumption is neither parallel nor counter

to objective reality, for the reality cannot be determined from the

information at hand. This is the situation in Colossians 1:23 – ei@ ge

e]pime<nete t^? pi<stei . . .; if you continue in the faith. The best

English word to use in all three situations is "if," and all major

English translations of the New Testament uniformly translate the

first class condition this way.

 

Evaluation of His Position

          A. T. Robertson's analysis of conditional sentences has blazed

a trail that many have followed in New Testament studies. His

terminology has become almost universal, and his rejection of Goodwin's

system has been accepted by almost all who have followed him. Unfortun-

ately, some have taken Robertson too simply and have read verification

(or non-verification) of external or objective reality into his First

and Second Class conditions. One could wish that he had been more

precise in his statements, but such difficulties are no excuse for

the misuse of his concepts one finds in the literature.


                                                                                                              55

William Douglas Chamberlain

          As a professor at Louisville Presbyterian Seminary, William

Douglas Chamberlain first published his Greek grammar in 1941: His

analysis is a concise summary of Robertson's work. Only a few remarks

need be made to indicate additional information he provides.

 

Statement of His Position

          Accepting Robertson's terminology, he affirms that in first class

conditions "The protasis has to do with the way the statement is made, and

not with the truth or falsity of it."1  Untrue conditions may be assumed

to be true for the sake of the argument. Matthew 12:27 is presented as

an example of this situation.

          In second class conditions he, like Robertson, identifies the

tenses used as past tenses: imperfect, aorist or pluperfect. It is

possible to have different tenses in the protasis and the apodosis, as

in John 14:28. While "the viewpoint is changed between the protasis and

the apodosis," the entire sentence is still a second class condition:

"These are not 'mixed conditions."'2

          He identifies the third class conditions as those which are

"stated as a matter of doubt, with some prospect of fulfillment."3

The fourth class is "even more doubtful than the third class."4  While

 

          1 William Douglas Chamberlain, An Exegetical Grammar of the Greek

New Testament (New York: The MacMillan Company, 1952), p. 195.

          2 Ibid., p. 197.

          3 Ibid., p. 198. 

          4 Ibid., p. 199. 


                                                                                                              56

he finds no complete example of this condition in the New Testament, he

does identify fragments in I Peter 3:14, I Corinthians 15:37, Acts 17:27,

and Acts 27:39.1

          Chamberlain discusses two other aspects of conditional

sentences which are also mentioned in Robertson, though not in so

succinct a manner: Mixed Conditions and Elliptical Conditions. The

first involves a change in class of condition between the protasis and

the apodosis, for the "writer changes his viewpoint between the protasis

and the apodosis."2 Luke 17:6 is listed as an example.

          The second topic, elliptical conditions, involves conditional

sentences in which the apodosis is expressed and the protasis is simply

implied. He lists four ways this is accomplished:

          1. By the participle: Rom. 2:27.

          2. By a verb in the imperative mode: Mark 1:17.

          3. The protasis may be abbreviated to the vanishing point as with

      ei] mh> in the case of 'except': Mt. 11:27.

          4. The apodosis may be omitted: Luke 19:42.3

Chamberlain also notes that the Hebraistic use of ei] in oaths

(Mark 8:12), and its use to introduce direct questions (Acts 1:6) are

not conditional sentences.4

 

Evaluation of His Position

          Chamberlain's little grammar provides a very readable synthesis

of Robertson's position without going into the fine details of historical

 

          1 Chamberlain, Grammar, p. 199.

          2 Ibid., p. 199.

          3 Ibid., p. 199

          4 Ibid.,  p. 200.


                                                                                                              57

analysis. Mood is the key factor in determining the type of conditional

sentence, and the indicative mood identifies sentences which present

the condition as true.

 

Charles Francis Digby Moule

          The English scholar C. F. D. Moule, publishing in 1953,

follows neither Robertson nor Goodwin in his analysis of conditional

sentences. He presents a unique system of both construction and

application, setting aside many of the chief dicta of other grammarians.

Statement of His Position

          He summarizes the various conditions under three headings:

          1. Past or present conditions, possible or actual.

          2. Recurrent or future conditions, whether real or hypothetical.

          3. Past or present conditions, only hypothetical.1

In outline form his system looks like this:

          1. Past or present conditions, possible or actual.

              Protasis:  ei] with the indicative in the appropriate tense.

              Apodosis: another indicative or its equivalent [an imperative,

              as in Col. 4:10, or conceivably a participle] in the appro-

              priate tense.

          2. Recurrent or future conditions, whether real or hypothetical.

              Protasis: ei] (or o!te) with a@n (making e]a<n, o[ta<n) with the

               subjunctive in the appropriate tense.

               Apodosis: Indicative or its equivalent [imperative or

               participle] in the appropriate tense.

          3. Past or present conditions, only hypothetical.

 

          1 C[harles] F[rancis] D[igby] Moule, An Idiom Book of New Testa-

ment Greek (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1953), p. 148.


                                                                                                              58

          Protasis: ei] with a past tense of the indicative.

          Apodosis: a past (but not necessarily the same) tense of the

          indicative, usually with a@n.1

          He sums up his concept of conditional sentences by stating:

          Thus the form of a conditional sentence is largely determined

     by two main factors—time (past, present, future) or Aktionsart  

     (instantaneous, protracted, recurrent, etc.) and the degree of

     reality (impossible, improbable, possible, probable, actual).2

Specific factors which help determine the mood of conditional sentences

include:

     (a) Any past condition introduced by if must, in the nature of the

     case, be hypothetical, if not definitely unreal: otherwise there

     would be nothing conditional about the sentence. Therefore there

     appears to be no need to vary the mood, and it is regularly

     Indicative.

     (b) But present, future, or recurrent conditions may vary widely

     in their degree of actuality: hence (perhaps) the variation in

     moods. In general, the Indic. represents certainty, while the

     Subj. represents something more hypothetical or uncertain.3

Moule thus recognizes the basic significance of these moods, but he

employs them in a unique system of analysis.

 

Evaluation of His Position

          Two observations may be made about this analysis. First,

Moule maintains that the apodosis is always in the indicative mood

regardless of the mood of the protasis. The specific examples will

be discussed in the next chapter, but this is an over-simplification, as

Galatians 5:25 demonstrates. Second and more important, this approach

 

          1 Moule, Idiom Book, pp. 148-149.

          2 Ibid., p. 150.

          3 Ibid., p. 149.


                                                                                                              59

seems to produce sentences that are one class by form and another by

meaning. Moule thinks that this is a problem:

          The difficulty of classifying is illustrated by sentences which

      belong by meaning in one class, but by form in another; e.g.:

      (1) in form, (2) in meaning: II Tim. ii:12 ei] u[pome<nomen, kai>

      sunbasileu<somen; II John 10 ei@ tij e@rxetai pro>j u[ma?j kai> tau<thn

      th>n didaxh>n ou] fe<rei, mh> lamba<nete au]to>n. Both these might well

      have had ean with Subj. in the protasis. (1), in meaning, (2) in

      form: I Cor. ix. 16 e]a>n ga>r eu]aggeli<zwmai, ou]k e@stin moi

     kau<xhma . . . .1

          But is this really a problem? The two examples listed as

being class 1 (possible or actual) by form and class 2 (recurrent or

future conditons) by meaning, 2 Tim. 2:12 and 2 John 10, are straight-

forward first class conditions in both form and meaning. It is futile

to suggest what "might well" have been written, for the text has been

set down as God wanted it given. One might feel that an exegetical

problem could be solved by treating 2 Tim. 2:12 as a hypothetical

condition, but such is not the case. It is a first class and needs

to be interpreted as such.  So with 1 Cor. 9:16; it is presented as

a hypothetical condition, even though facts outside the condition

establish that it is an actual situation. There is no need to rewrite

the statement.

          It seems reasonable to ask, If one's analysis produces such

apparent contradictions as Moule felt his did, should the analysis be

pursued? It seems-unlikely that such diverse situations would arise in

the normal development of a language. Significant also is the fact that

no other grammarian has followed Moule in this approach. All seem to

 

          1 Moule, Idiom Book, p. 149.


                                                                                                              60

have recognized the weakness in his system.

 

Friedrich Blass - Albert Debrunner

          In 1911 Friedrich Blass published his Grammar of New Testament

Greek. It passed through several editions and translations and was

continued after his death by Albert Debrunner, a professor of Indo-

European and classical Philology at the University of Bern.  Robert

W. Funk of the University of Montana prepared a new translation and

revision of this work as a companion grammar to Arnt and Gingrich's

Lexicon. Funk's revision is the one under consideration.

 

Statement of His Position

          Blass-Debrunner recognizes five forms of conditional sentences

in Classical Greek, four of which are present in the New Testament:

          (1) Ei] with the indicative of all tenses denotes a simple

      conditional assumption with emphasis on the reality of the assump-

      tion (not of what is being assumed): the condition is considered

      'a real case.'

          (2) Ei] with the optative presents something as thought of,

     without regard for reality or unreality, and emphasizes the

     hypothetical character of the assumption: 'a potential case.'

          (3) Ei] with an augmented tense of the indicative marks the

      assumption as contrary to fact: 'an unreal case.'

          (4)   ]Ea<n with the subjunctive denotes that which under certain

     circumstances is expected from an existing general or concrete

     standpoint in the present: 'case of expectation.'

          (5) Ei] with the optative also specifies repetition in past

      time.1

          Of these five forms, (2) has almost disappeared from the New Testament

and (5) has completely disappeared. Blass-Debrunner thus comes close

to Robertson's (and Gildersleeve's) four conditions. Indeed, Funk

 

          1 Blass-Debrunner, Grammar, p. 188.


                                                                                                              61

speaks of Robertson's organization as "especially lucid."1 Unfortunately,

neither Blass-Debrunner's nor Funk's comments have the same quality, so

some explanatory comments are necessary.

          The first group, the "real case," speaks of

     . . . a present reality = 'if . . . really' (as you say, as is

     believed, as you see, etc.) or = 'if therefore' (resulting from

     what has been said), often closely bordering on causal

       'since' . . . .2

Were one to change the adverb "often" to "infrequently," he would be

closer to the truth of the New Testament. He comes closer in his

first statement that this condition places emphasis on "the reality of

the assumption (not of what is being assumed)." This distinction between

the statement of a situation and the actual situation itself must be

maintained. In Matthew 12:27, for example, Jesus speaks of His

exorcism in a way that is directly counter to the reality of the situa-

tion. This fits Blass-Debrunner's statement.

          The third group, ei] with an augmented indicative verb,

indicates a condition that is contrary to fact. Unlike Classical Greek,

the "addition of a@n to the apodosis is no longer obligatory."3  These

conditions are "remarkably scarce in Paul."4

 

          1 Blass-Debrunner, Grammar, p. 189.

          2 Ibid., p. 189.

          3 Ibid., p. 182.

          4 Ibid., p. 182.


                                                                                                              62

          The fourth group, e]a<n with the subjunctive, refers to future

situations. These situations may be of a general or specific nature

("general or concrete standpoint"), corresponding to the often-mentioned

present general condition. The use of e]a<n with the subjunctive to

refer to future time is normal. "There is," he notes, "no certain

example of e]a<n with the future indicative in the NT."1  This is not

unexpected, for there has always been a close affinity between the

future indicative and the subjunctive. Indeed, the origin of the future

indicative may well have been a mixture of "the Indo-European future,

which denoted future time, and the subjunctive of the sigmatic aorist."2

This close relationship has been noted before.

 

Evaluation of His Position

          Blass-Debrunner agrees with Robertson in his stress upon the

limitation of the reality of the first class condition to the statement,

not the situation. Although Funk respects Robertson's analysis, he

retains the original terminology of Blass's work. While there may

not be general agreement between this grammar and that of Robertson on

titles, there is on the forms and their significance.

 

Nigel Turner

          Nigel Turner's role in finishing the grammar started by Moulton

has already been set forth. His volume on syntax represents conditional

 

          1 Blass-Debrunner, Grammar, p. 190.

          2 Ibid., p. 166.


                                                                                                              63

sentences under their respective parts: moods, tenses, etc. Only

towards the end does he summarize his conclusions.

Statement of His Position

          In outline form his analysis is:

       (i)          ei] with indic., representing the simple assumption . . .

       (ii)         ei] with opt., representing the "potential" conception . . . .

       (iii)        ei] with aor. or impf. indic., representing an assumption as

                    not corresponding with reality . . . .

      (iv)         e]a<n with subj., indicating an expected result based on the

                    present general or particular circumstance . . . .1

Turner presents a system of analysis that combines features of Moulton

along with some of Goodwin. It is instructive to see what new insights

this gives for each of these conditions.

 

Details of His Position

          Turner does not give a detailed discussion of the first type

of condition except to note that ei] with the future indicative,

unlike e]a<n with the present subjunctive, calls attention to "The

feeling of definiteness and actual realization [that] accompanies it.

It is almost causal."2  He recognizes the problem posed by 2 Timothy

2:12, but offers no suggested answer: "The difficulty about this view

is 2 Ti 212 ei] a]parnhso<meqa, where the condition was surely conceived

as no more than hypothetical."3

 

          1 Turner, Syntax, p. 319.

          2 Ibid., p. 115.

          3 Ibid., p. 115.


                                                                                                              64

          Turner notes that in the third group of conditional sentences,

the "unreal" conditions, the past tenses are used and retain their

proper Aktionsart. Thus the imperfect stands for "what should be now"

and the aorist for "what should have been."1  In both cases, reality is

not found in what the speaker wants it to be or to have been.

          His discussion of the fourth group of conditions (protasis =

e]a<n with the subjunctive) includes the concept of particular and

general as defined by the Aktionsart (as he understands it) of the

verbs employed:

          (1) Present: very common in Koine. In a general and iterative

     sense, as "condicio universalis" . . . , the pres. subj. denotes a

     hypothesis which can occur over and over again (present Aktionsart).

     The most common example of this condition in the Ptol. Pap. is

     stereotyped phrases in decrees and punishments, having a continual

     validity.

          (2) Aorist: This represents a definite event as occurring

      only once in the future, and conceived as taking place before the

      time of the action of the main verb. It is expectation, but not

      fulfillment as yet.2

Here he evidences the common, though erroneous, view of the significance

of the aorist tense. Further, he does not make the concept of particular

and general a basis of classification, only of interpretation.

          Not all conditional sentences fit neatly into this four-group

package, and Turner speaks of "a liberal mixing in the various categories

of conditional sentences."3 The specifics remain to be explored, but

 

          1 Turner, Syntax, p. 91.

          2 Ibid., p. 114.

          3 Ibid., p. 319.


                                                                                                              65

it would seem, as with Moule, that any system that produces such

results needs to be reexamined.

 

H. E. Dana and Julius R. Mantey

          The appearance of Dana and Mantey's Manual Grammar probably

accounted for the disappearance of Robertson's Shorter Grammar of the

Greek New Testament as a standard intermediate text.1  In their book

these authors summarize Robertson's analysis and add some interesting

terminology and explanations of their own.

 

Statement of Their Position

          The basis upon which they classify conditional sentences is

"the attitude that they express with reference to reality."2  This is

expressed through the mood of the protasis. The indicative points to

a condition from the viewpoint of reality. The subjunctive and

optative moods point to a condition from the viewpoint of probability.3

Those conditions which use the indicative mood are divided into

two sub-classes. The first, termed the "simple condition," presents

"one fact as conditioning another." In this form "nothing is implied

as to whether or not this fact actually exists."4 The second sub-class

 

          1 Now available as a reprint: A. T. Robertson and W. Hersey Davis,

A New Short Grammar of the Greek Testament, 10th edition (Grand Rapids:

Baker Book House, 1977).

          2 Dana and Mantey, Grammar, p. 287.

          3 Ibid., p. 287.

          4 Ibid., p. 287.


                                                                                                              66     

implies that "this fact has not been realized, and therefore does not

exist. This we call the contrary to fact condition."1  These two types,

then,

      . . . assume that the premise is either true or untrue. The speaker

     takes for granted that which he assumes is true, as in the simple

     condition; or that it is known not to be true, as is the case in the

     contrary to fact condition. The indicative, being the mood for

     reality, is regularly used in this type of sentence.2

Using Matthew 12:27 as a test case, it is clear that their first state-

ment (The condition implies nothing about the actual facts of the case.)

is more accurate than the second one. Jesus did take His assumed link

with Beelzebub for granted, but only for the sake of the argument.

          Conditions utilizing the subjunctive mood are termed the "more

probable future conditions," and those with the optative are the "less

probable future conditions."3 All of these conditions utilize the

particle a@n whether by itself or in combination with ei] (ei] + a@n =

e]a<n).4

 

Evaluation of Their Position

          Their observations on the construction of the four types of

conditional sentences are identical to Robertson's. They identify three

types of irregular forms of conditional sentences: (1) mixed conditions,

 

          1 Dana and Mantey, Grammar, p. 287.

          2 Ibid., p. 288.

          3 Ibid., p. 287.

          4 Ibid., p. 288.


                                                                                                              67

(2) implied conditions "in which the apodosis is expressed and the protasis

implied in a participle (I Tim. 4:4), imperative (Mk. 1:17), or question

(Mt. 26:15)," and elliptical conditions.1

          Although their terminology is somewhat different than that of

Robertson, the closeness of their position to his places them under

the same evaluation.

 

Robert W. Funk

          As Professor of Religious Studies at the University of Montana,

Robert W. Funk has not only translated and enlarged the standard

grammar of Blass-Debrunner, but has produced one of his own. His

discussion of conditional sentences reflects the basic system of

Robertson, but with significant comparisons to Classical grammars,

especially the work of Smyth.

 

Statement of His Position

          The first class condition presents "a simple conditional

assumption with emphasis on the reality of the assumption (but not on

the reality of what is being assumed)."2 This is the same statement he

used in his revision of Blass-Debrunner, and the same clarification is

necessary. By "assumption" he means the statement of the situation,

and by "what is being assumed" he means the situation itself. The use

of the future tense in both the protasis and apodosis is the equivalent

 

          1 Dana and Mantey, Grammar, p. 291.

          2 Funk, Grammar, II, p. 680.


                                                                                                    68

of Smyth's "future most vivid" condition, but Funk recognizes it as a

special form of the first class condition.1

          His analysis of the second class is the same as Robertson. The

third class of conditions utilizes the subjunctive mood in the protasis

and is called "a probable case."2  The use of the present tense in the

apodosis "often gives the condition a generalizing force (indicated

by event in the translation)."3  This is what Smyth termed the "future

more vivid" condition.

 

Evaluation of His Position

          Funk demonstrates the advantages of classification by reality

as expressed in the mood of the protasis. He is able to present a

simple, easily comprehended, system and account for the many subspecies

recognized by other grammarians. His improvement upon Robertson's

system is more in terms of organization than content.

 

William Sanford La Sor

          William Sanford La Sor is more familiar to scholars for his work

in Hebrew rather than Greek, for he is Professor of Old Testament at

Fuller Theological Seminary. He has, however, published a two-volume

handbook of Greek grammar based on an inductive study of Acts. In this

work he follows a system unique to modern Koine grammarians: that of

 

          1 Funk, Grammar, II, p. 684.

          2 Ibid., p. 683.

          3 Ibid., p. 683.


                                                                                                              69

Goodwin.

 

Statement of His Position

          The outline of his position is almost identical to that of

Goodwin:

     Simple Condition,

          Protasis = ei] + indicative

          Apodosis = indicative or equivalent

      Unreal Condition

          Protasis = ei] + past indicative

          Apodosis = (a@n) + past indicative

      Present General Condition

          Protasis = e]a<n + subjunctive

          Apodosis = present indicative

      More Vivid Future Condition

          Protasis = e]a<n + subjunctive/other

          Apodosis = future indicative

      Less Vivid Future Condition

          Protasis = ei] + optative

          Apodosis = a@n + optativel

          This classification is based upon time and reality, as was

that of Goodwin. La Sor states that:

     Present conditions can be only noncommittal or general . .

     Past conditions can be noncommittal or contrary to fact . . . .

     Future conditions can be only probable. But the degree of probability

     in the speaker's mind is variable. There is a more probable (or

     "more vivid") future condition. . . and a less probable (or "less

     vivid") future condition . . . .2

          He offers some interesting comments on the various types of

conditions. For example, he says that the simple condition [obviously]

 

          1 William Sanford La Sor, Handbook of New Testament Greek, 2

volumes (Grand Rapids: Wm. B. Eerdmans Publishing Company, 1973), II,

p.. 225.

          2 Ibid., p. 222.


                                                                                                              70

may refer to past time by using a past tense in the protasis. This

form is very similar to that of the unreal condition, which also uses

a past (augmented) tense in the protasis. Further, he notes that the

regular negative particle for the protases of past simple conditions

is mh<, even with the indicative tense: "Where ou] is used, it probably

negates a word in the protasis and not the entire protasis."1 He also

identifies mh< as the negative particle of unreal conditions, "even though

it [the verb] is indicative."2

 

Evaluation of His Position

          La Sor evidences the same problem that Goodwin does in his

analysis: classification more by interpretation than by form. He notes,

for example, that the present general condition, which uses e]a<n and the

subjunctive mood, is often "close to, if not identical with the simple

condition . . . except for the use of         e]a<n + sbjtv. [sic]"3

          The more vivid future condition "is expressed by using say in

the protasis, generally with the subjunctive, and a future indicative or

equivalent in the apodosis."4  La Sor then remarks that "there is

considerable variation in the protasis of this type of condition: and

offers these examples:

 

          1 La Sor, Grammar, II, p. 223.

          2 Ibid., p. 224.

          3 Ibid., p. 224.

          4  Ibid., p. 224.


                                                                                                    71

     With ei] + subjtv: Lk. 9:13; I Cor. 14:5.

     With ei] or e]a<n + fut. ind.: Ac. 8:31; 2 Tim. 2:12.

     With ei] + pres. ind.: Matt. 8:31; I Cor. 10:27.1

Again, it would seem that interpretation more than form is the guiding

principle of classification. The specific verses will be analyzed in

the following sections of this study. La Sor's position will have to

be carefully evaluated, for he represents a unique position among

modern Koine grammarians.

 

                              Summary of Koine Grammarians

          The twelve Koine grammarians discussed in this section may be

classified into two groups: (1) those who do not follow Robertson: Moule

and La Sor, and (2) those who do: all the rest. The first group pursues

either their own approach, such as Moule, or follow most Classical

grammarians, as La Sor does. They are a decided minority among Koine

grammarians, both early and modern.

          The second group follows the system presented by Robertson in

Koine studies and Gildersleeve in Classical grammar. These classify

conditional sentences according to the reality of the condition as

expressed by the mood of the protasis. The first group basically follows

the time of the condition as the principle of classification.

          The relation of the condition to reality is either actual or

potential. The moods utilized in the protasis indicate these relation-

ships: indicative = actual, subjunctive or optative = potential. The

 

          1 La Sor, Grammar, II, p. 224.


                                                                                                              72

first group of conditions, those using the indicative mood, may be real

or unreal. The speaker may assume that the condition is a real condition,

or he may assume that it is not. In either case the indicative mood is

used, and in both cases the reality is limited to the statement, not

the situation. The second group, those conditions presented as

potential, involve two degrees of potentiality. Here the grammarians

struggle with terminology. Dana and Mantey are the least ambiguous with

their terms "more probable" and "less probable." The degrees of

probability are indicated by the subjunctive and optative moods,

respectively.


 

 

 

 

                                        CHAPTER II

 

                              THE SIMPLE CONDITION

 

          A survey of the various grammarians and their attempts to

classify conditional sentences is helpful, but not determinative. Only

an inductive analysis of the New Testament examples can offer definitive

evidence for one system over another. Such an inductive study is the

goal of the next four chapters.

 

                                          Introduction

          The following steps were taken to achieve this goal: (1) All

conditional sentences were identified and entered on index cards. This

was accomplished by looking at every reference containing a conditional

particle as listed in Englishman’s Greek Concordance. Each card showed

the protasis, apodosis and verb parsings of every condition. Supplied

verbs were entered based upon context and reference to the New American

Standard Bible.

          (2) This information was then entered on punch cards for ease

in mechanical sorting. The cards were then sorted into the various groups

as indicated in the following chapters. This arrangement also facilitated

rapid cross-checking of the various types of conditions.

          (3) The information on each punch card was again verified from

the Greek New Testament and the lists were prepared. There are no

complete listings of all conditional sentences in the New Testament.

                                               73
                                                                                                              74

Robertson offers a full, albeit incomplete listing in the Appendix of his

grammar,1 and J. W. Roberts has even more extensive lists in his disser-

tation.2  After the author had completed his lists, he compared them

to Robertson and Roberts and made the necessary adjustments. Since

Roberts' were more complete, they were usually consulted. Careful

study showed that while they were extensive, they were not perfect. The

results, it is hoped, will be even more extensive.

          It is readily acknowledged that these lists are not perfect.

Many apodosis verbs have to be supplied from the context, and honest

differences of opinion exist as to what tense and mood is to be

inserted. Also, in a study of this magnitude, omissions and errors

are possible, although every effort has been made to keep such to a

minimum. Individual questions about specific conditions, though, will

not affect the general picture that emerges from the data, and this is

the desired goal.

          In order to avoid problems with certain incorrect implications

drawn from A. T. Robertson's terminology and its inadequacies, the

"neutral" terminology of Dana and Mantey will be employed. Again, their

definition of a simple condition:

 

          1 A. T. Robertson, A Grammar of the Greek New Testament in the

Light of Historical Research Nashville, Tennessee: Broadman Press, 1934),

pp. 1416-1419.

          2 J. W. Roberts, "The Use of Conditional Sentences in the Greek

New Testament as Compared with Homeric, Classical and Helenistic Uses,"

unpublished Ph.D. dissertation, the University of Texas, 1955.


                                                                                                              75

     This condition was used when one wished to assume or to seem to

     assume the reality of his premise. Ei] occurs regularly in the

     protasis, with any tense of the indicative. There is no fixed

     form for the apodosis--any mood or tense may occur.1

          Appendix I lists the occurrences of the simple condition, and

verifies their observation: most moods and tenses do appear. The summary

of these occurrences is:

          Protasis using ei] with the present indicative . .           221 examples

          Protasis using ei] with the aorist indicative. . . 56 examples

          Protasis using ei] with the future indicative. . . 22 examples

          Protasis using ei] with the perfect indicative . .           12 examples

                                                                                311 examples

 

                           The Conditional Particle Ei]

          The discussion of the simple condition begins with a brief

analysis of its components. Taking them in order of appearance, the

first subject is the condition particle ei].

 

                                   The Significance of Ei]

          When used by itself, ei] may be several things, including

(1) a conditional particle, (2) a type of aposiopesis (a sudden breaking

off of what is stated), especially as a replacement for the Hebrew Mxi  

and (3) an interrogative particle.2

 

          1 H. E. Dana and Julius R. Mantey, A Manual Grammar of the Greek

New Testament (New York: The MacMillan Company, 1966), p. 289.

          2 William F. Arndt and F. Wilbur Gingrich, A Greek-English

Lexicon of the New Testament and Other Early Christian Literature,

second edition (Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1979), pp. 219-

220.


                                                                                                    76

As a Conditional Particle

          Ei] regularly appears with the indicative mood to indicate the

simple condition. It also occurs with the subjunctive mood in Luke 9:13;

Romans 11:14; I Corinthians 9:11 (T.R.), 14:15; Philippians 3:11,12;

I Thessalonians 5:10; and Revelation 11:5. Since the mood of the

verb determines the type of condition, not the particle employed,

these specific passages are discussed in the next chapter.   Ei] also

appears with the optative in the less probable future conditions.

 

As an Interrogative Particle

          Not all occurrences of ei] mark conditional sentences, for it is

used to indicate questions, especially indirect ones. Robertson notes

that its use with direct questions is close to an elliptical condition

and suggests Mark 15:44 and Luke 23:6 as examples.1 This is parallel

with its use in marking out direct quotes, frequently serving as

quote marks in English (e.g. Matthew 12:10). Robertson further

suggests that this use may be due to the fact that the Septuagint

utilizes ei] at times to translate the h-interrogative, as here in

Matthew 12:10.2  This usage is a change from the usual Classical use of

ei]. One cannot automatically think "conditional sentence" whenever

he observes this particle in the text.

 

          1 A. T. Robertson, Grammar, p. 916.

          2 Ibid., p. 916.


                                                                                                              77

In Aposiopesis

          A third important use of ei] is in aposiopesis,

      . . . the sudden breaking off of what is being said (or written),

     so that the mind may be more impressed by what is too wonderful,

     or solemn, or awful for words: or when a thing may be, as we some-

     times say, "better imagined than described."1

In this construction, the protasis is stated and the writer drops the

sentence, letting the reader draw his conclusion, as in Luke 19:42.

A related use is to translate the Hebrew particle Mxi. This is a

recognized Hebraism and is not a conditional sentence.

          Ei] does have a number of uses, but the most important one is

that of the conditional particle. Before pursuing its most common

use, brief mention should be made of its appearances in combination with

other particles.

 

                      The Significance of Ei] with Other Particles

Ei] a]ra<

          There are only two New Testament examples of ei] a@ra: Mark 11:13

and Acts 8:22. This combination emphasizes the assumption: "When placed

after pronouns and interrogative particles, it refers to a preceding

assertion or fact, or even to something existing only in the

mind . . . ."2  Acts 8:22 (deh<qhti tou? kuri<ou ei] a@ra a]feqh<setai< soi)

 

          1 E. W. Bullinger, Figures of Speech Used in the Bible (Grand

Rapids: Baker Book House, 1968 reprint of 1898 edition), p. 154.

          2 Joseph Henry Thayer, Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New

Testament, reprint of Corrected Edition (Marshallton, Delaware: The

National Foundation for Christian Education, n.d.), p. 71.


                                                                                                              78

is translated by Thayer as "If, since thy sin is so grievous, perhaps

the thought etc."1  This usage is similar to ei] pw?j, as will be seen

below.

 

Ei]pe<r

          Six undisputed examples of ei]pe<r are found in the New Testament:

Romans 8:9,17; I Corinthians 8:5, 15:15; 2 Thessalonians 1:6 and

I Peter 2:3. I  2 Corinthians 5:3 B, D. E. and G support ei]pe<r.  Ei] ge< is

the accepted reading, supported by x, C, K, L and P.2  This combination

emphasizes the concept under discussion: the particle per means "to do

a thing to the limit (beyond), thoroughly."3  Suggested translations of

ei]pe<r include "if indeed, if after all, since."4  Use of this particle

combination emphasizes the veracity of the condition being discussed.

Interestingly, only Paul employs this construction.

 

Ei] ge<

          The combination of ei] ge< is represented by five New Testament

examples: 2 Corinthians 5:3; Galatians 3:4; Ephesians 3:2, 4:21; and

Colossians 1:23. This combination emphasizes the conditional nature of

 

          1 Thayer, Lexicon, p. 71.

          2 W. Robertson Nicoll, editor, The Expositor’s Greek Testament,

5 volumes (Grand Rapids: Wm. B. Eerdmans Publishing Co., 1967), II, p. 66.

          3 Robertson, Grammar, p. 1154.

          4 Arndt and Gingrich, Lexicon, p. 219.


                                                                                                              79

the thought. Commenting on ei] ge< kai> ei]kh? in Galatians 3:4 Lightfoot

remarks:

      Ei@ ge< leaves a loophole for doubt, and kai< widens this, implying

      an unwillingness to believe on the part of the speaker. Hermann's

     distinction . . . that ei@ ge< assumes the truth of a proposition

     while ei@per leaves it doubtful, requires modifying before it is

     applied to the New Testament, where ei@per is, if anything, more

     directly affirmative than ei] ge<.1

          Arndt and Gingrich suggest "if indeed, inasmuch as" as possible

translations of this combination and render Galatians 3:4 as "have you

experienced so many things in vain? If it really was in vain . . . .”2

The particle ge< performs its usual emphatic function, strengthening the

word to which it is attached, and stresses the conditional nature of

the concept.

 

Ei] kai<

          The combination ei] kai< is used to introduce concessive clauses,

and is usually translated "even if."  Robertson represents the majority

opinion when he writes that concessive clauses "are really just

 conditional clauses with the addition of kai<."3  Blass-Debrunner agrees

with this evaluation.4  Burton, as Robertson noted, draws a major

distinction between conditional and concessive clauses:

 

          1 J. B. Lightfoot, The Epistle of St. Paul to the Galatians

(Grand Rapids: Zondervan Publishing House, 1966 reprint of 1866 edition),

pp. 135-136.

          2 Arndt and Gingrich, Lexicon, p. 152.

          3 Robertson, Grammar, p. 1026.

          4 Friedrich Blass and Albert Debrunner, A Greek Grammar of the

New Testament and Other Early Christian Literature, translated and revised

by Robert W. Funk (Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1961), p. 190.


                                                                                                              80

          The force of a concessive sentence is thus very different

      from that of a conditional sentence. The latter represents the

      fulfillment of the apodosis as conditioned on the fulfillment of

      the protasis; the former represents the apodosis as fulfilled in

      spite of the fulfillment of the protasis.1

          He does recognize, though, that there are times when the two

clauses become almost identical:

     Yet there are cases in which by the weakening of the character-

     istic force of each construction, or by the complexity of the

     elements expressed by the protasis, the two usages approach so

     near to each other as to make distinction between them difficult.2

          Few Koine grammarians follow Burton in this distinction. For

purposes of classification, concessive clauses were omitted from the

lists of conditional sentences in the appendices. Including them would,

of course, alter the total number of examples, but would not affect

the general conclusions.

 

Ei] pw?j

          The last particle combination is ei] pw?j.  This occurs three

times with the indicative mood (Romans 1:10, 11:14 and Philippians

3:11), twice with the subjunctive (Romans 11:14 and Philippians 3:11),

and once with the optative mood (Acts 27:12). This combination, like

ei] a@ra, serves to heighten the question involved. It is uniformly

translated in the Authorized Version as "if by any means."

          While each of these particle combinations has its special point

of emphasis, it is the conditional use of ei] that is the center of

attention. The next area of discussion will be that of the negative

 

          1 Ernest DeWitt Burton, Syntax of Moods and Tenses in New

Testament Greek (Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1897), p. 112.

          2 Ibid., p. 112.

 

 


                                                                                                              81

particles employed in the simple condition.

 

                      Negative Particles in Simple Conditions

          The topic of negative particles in conditional sentences shows

how far Koine Greek has moved from Classical Greek, for the divergence

in form and style is marked.

 

The Classical Pattern

          W. W. Goodwin will serve as the standard for presenting the

classical pattern of negative particles in conditional sentences:

          The negative particle of the protasis is regularly mh<, that

of the apodosis is ou].

          When ou] is found in a protasis, it is generally closely connected

with a particular word (especially the verb), with which it forms a

single negative expression; so that its negative force does not (like

that of mh<) affect the protasis as a whole.1

Though there are, of course, exceptions, Goodwin's rule states the

general case for the Classical literature. The Koine situation is

quite different.

 

The Koine Pattern

          Statement.--Alexander Buttmann, an early Koine grammarian,

recognized the distinction between Koine and Classical Greek on this

point:

          The use of ou] in the protasis of a conditional sentence occurs

      in the N.T. relatively very often; so that we are

 

          1 W. W. Goodwin, Syntax of the Moods and Tenses of the Greek

Verb (Boxton: Ginn and Company, 1893), p. 138.

 


                                                                                                              82

      justified in inferring a difference in usage, since in classical

     writers this use is only exceptional.1

          A later writer, J. H. Moulton, approvingly quotes Blass's rule for

the negative particles in Koine: "'All instances,' he says, 'may

practially he brought under the single rule, that ou] negatives the

indicative, mh< the other moods, including the infinitive and

participle."2

          Robertson agrees, noting that "The negative of the protasis in

the first class condition is practically always ou] in the N.T. We have

ei] ou] as a rule, not ei] mh<."3  This rule is not absolute, and he

identifies five exceptions, listed in the next section. Both he and

Moulton see the simple absolute rule of ou] with the indicative and mh  

with the other moods as a goal "not yet reached in the N.T." but almost

completely met in Modern Greek.4

 

          Specific examples.--The authorities list different totals for

the various combinations. Moulton finds thirty-one examples of ei] ou]  

in simple condition protases,5 Robertson thirty-four,6 and Roberts

 

          1 Alexander Buttmann, A Grammar of the New Testament Greek, trans-

lated and edited by J. H. Thayer (Andover: Warren F. Draper, Publisher,

1873), pp. 344-345.

          2 J. H. Moulton, Grammar of New Testament Greek. Volume I:

Prolegomena, third edition (Edinburgh: T. & T. Clark, 1908), p. 170.

          3 Robertson, Grammar, p. 1101.

          4 Ibid., p. 1101, Moulton, Prolegomena, p. 170.

          5 Moulton, Prolegomena, p. 171.

          6 Robertson, Grammar, p. 1111.

 


                                                                                                              83

thirty-five.1  Whatever the discrepancies, the preponderance of this form

is clear when compared to only five examples of ei] mh<:  Mark 6:5,

I Corinthians 15:2, 2 Corinthians 13:5, Galatians 1:7 and I Timothy 6:3.

Of these five, only Mark 6:5 and I Timothy 6:3 have unanimous acceptance

as examples of the classical pattern.

          Godet considers I Corinthians 15:2 "a pleonasm arising from the

mixing of the two following constructions: excepting if (e]kto<j ei])

and: if not (ei] mh<).2  Lenski agrees with this identification.3

          Lightfoot explains Galatians 1:7 so:

     Ei] mh< seems always to retain, at least in this stage of the

     language, its proper exceptive sense, and is not simply oppositive,

     though it frequently approaches nearly to a]lla< . . . .4

This construction "may either state an exception to the preceding

negative clause (= except, save) or merely qualify it (= but only),

as it does in Luke iv. 26 . . . and in Gal. 1. 7 . . . ."5 The same

basic construction is found in 2 Corinthians 13:5 – ei] mh<ti a]doki<moi e@ste.

          The ratio of five to thirty-five examples gives credence to

Buttmann's claim that the Koine shows a wide divergence from the

Classical usage in the negative particles in the simple condition. The

presence of a relatively few examples of mh< show that the Classical

heritage has not been completely lost in the New Testament.

 

          1 Roberts, "Conditional Sentences," p. 153.

          2 Frederick Louis Godet, Corinthians, II, p. 269.

          3 Lenski, Corinthians, p. 629.

          4 Lightfoot, Galatians, p. 77.

          5 Nicoll, Testament, III, p. 156.


                                                                                                    84

                              ]Ea<n with the Indicative Mood

          Although, the general principle of simple conditions is that the

protasis consists of ei] with the indicative mood, there are exceptions.

A few such conditions employ ean with the indicative in an apparent

contradiction to this principle: Mark 8:3; Luke 19:40; John 8:54,

21:22,23; Acts 8:31; I Thessalonians 3:8; I John 5:15 and Revelation

2:22.

 

                               Explanation of the Form

          While these nine exceptions are a small percentage of the total,

they are a phenomenon that needs explanation. Several explanations may

be offered.

 

Development of the Language

          First of all, Koine Greek represents a stage in the historical

development of the language. As the language progressed from Classical

through Koine to Modern, the distinction between ei] and e]a<n faded,

especially in respect to their respective moods. In the later Koine

"the use of e]a<n with the ind. is rather more frequent . .        . Finally

ei] came to be 'a mere literary alternative.'"1  Blass-Debrunner also

recognizes this consequence of linguistic development.2   The New

Testament, therefore, represents a period in which the general principle

is operative, but a transition is evident. Robertson summarizes: "In

general, the difference between ei] and e]a<n is considerably lessened

 

          1 Robertson, Grammar, p. 1009.

          2 Blass-Debrunner, Grammar, p. 190.


                                                                                                              85

in the koinh<, though it must be remembered that e]a<n was never confined

to the subj. nor ei] to the ind. and opt."1

 

Textual Emendations

          While the development of the language may be one consideration

in explaining these apparent exceptions, textual emendations are

another. Buttmann raises this observation and caution:

          It is, indeed, not to be denied that the instances in question

     almost disappear amid the multitude of those that are grammatically

     regular, and suspicion may also be raised by the circumstances

     that hardly a single passage with the Indicative is completely

     beyond question critically. Yet when we consider that in countless

     passages with the Subjunctive not the smallest variation is found

     (which would not be the case if the Indicative were chargeable solely

     to the copyists), it is far more probable that, where a diversity

     of readings occurs in such a number of instances, this fact results

     from the circumstance that the copyists, commentators, etc., early

     altered the Indicative which gave them offence.2

          Winer also notes the significance of textual variations in

his comments on the subject.3  Both grammarians, however, recognize the

legitimate identification of e]a<n with the indicative in the New Testa-

ment in spite of the fact that most of the examples show textual

variants.

          How wide-spread is this textual difficulty? A review of the

available evidence supports the claim of Buttmann: such constructions

 

          1 Robertson, Grammar, pp. 1009-1010.

          2 Buttmann, Grammar, p. 222.

          3 G. B. Winer, A Grammar of the Idiom of the New Testament,

seventh edition, revised by Gottfried Lunemann, translated by J. H.

Thayer (Andover: Warren F. Draper, Publisher, 1893), p. 294.


                                                                                                              86

are part of the original text. Robertson discusses several passages which

have been challenged,1 and Roberts lists the textual evidence for

some of them and adds a few examples of his own.2

          Thus two things seem to be born out: (1) there has been some

alteration of the text in apparent attempts to bring specific passages

into conformity with the general rule and (2) e]a<n was used with the

indicative mood in some passages of the original text of the New

Testament.3

 

                                  Significance of the Form

          If the use of e]a<n with the indicative is part of the original

text, then what is its significance? Specific answers vary: Robertson,

of course, sees no special significance. The key for him is the mood,

not the particle. Therefore he sees no basic difference between the

two types of protases, for each uses the indicative mood.4  Both

represent simple conditions. Burton agrees, though he speaks less

dogmatically:

          In a few instances say is used with the Present Indicative in

      the protasis of a conditional sentence, apparently to express a

      simple present supposition. I Thess. 3:8, I John 5:15.5

 

          1 Robertson, Grammar, p. 1010.

          2 Roberts, "Conditional Sentences," pp. 146-149.

          3 Moulton, Prolegomena, p. 168.

          4 Robertson, Grammar, p. 1007.

          5 Burton, Syntax, p. 103.


                                                                                                              87

      Blass-Debrunner offer no comment either way.1

          Roberts approaches the subject from the historical side and

discusses the use of e]a<n in conditional sentences in the Septuagint.

In this section of his dissertation he relies upon the work of James

Sterenberg who wrote a dissertation for the University of Munich in

1908 entitled "The Use of Conditional Sentences in the Alexandrian

Version of the Pentateuch."  This work was not available to the author,

so Roberts' conclusions will have to be accepted at face value:

          It will be remembered that Sterenberg noted that the construction

      is used in the LXX (where it occurs with the perfect, present,

     imperfect, and the aorist indicatives) mostly in laws in the protases

     of which transgressions and the like are minutely defined and that it

     is used to render the original thought more exactly to avoid

     ambiguity; e.g., where the verb in the protasis is thought to

     precede in time the event or the immediately preceding verb, or in

     one verb when the event may be supposed as a possible event,

     requiring the indicative, but where both verbs are governed by e]a<n.2

          This, though, is the sense of the construction in the Septuagint.

New Testament examples are not, as Roberts notes, "so related to laws."3

It would seem that the observations based upon the Septuagint do not

fit the New Testament examples.

          Neither do the commentators offer much help. Lenski identifies

the ean of I Thessalonians 3:8 as "looking to the future."4  Lightfoot,

 

          1 Blass-Debrunner, Grammar, p. 190.

          2 Roberts, "Conditional Sentences," p. 149.

          3 Ibid., p. 149.

          4 R. C. H. Lenski, The Interpretation of St. Paul’s Epistles to

the Corinthians to the Thessalonians, to Timothy, to Titus and to

Philemon (Minneapolis: Augsburg Publishing House, 1961), p. 291.


                                                                                                              88

after defending the indicative in the same verse, equates doubt with

the particle:

          St. Paul speaks with some hesitation here 'if so be ye stand

      fast.' Their faith was not complete (ver. 10). There was enough

      in the fact that they had been so recently converted, enough in

      the turn which their thoughts had recently taken, absorbed so

      entirely in the contemplation of the future state, to make the

     Apostle alarmed lest their faith should prove only impulsive and

      transitory.1

The Expositor's Greek Testament notes that the future indicative in

Revelation 2:22 "expresses rather more probability than the subj. with

e]a<n mh<.”2

          What, then, can be said about a distinction in meaning between

e]a<n with the indicative and ei] with the indicative?  Nothing, really.

There are too few examples upon which to build rules, and the distinction,

if any, is nebulous at best. Roberts accurately states the case: "This

writer is able to discover no distinction which can be put in a rule."3

Neither is this one.

 

                            Significance of Moods and Tenses

          Since the deciding factor in identifying a simple condition

is the indicative mood in the protasis and not the conditional particle,

the next step in discussing the simple condition is to evaluate the

significance of the various moods and tenses in the protasis and apodosis.

 

          1 J. B. Lightfoot, Notes on the Epistles of St. Paul (Grand Rapids:

Zondervan Publishing House, 1957 reprint of 1895 edition), p. 46.

          2 Nicoll, Testament, V, p. 361.

          3 Roberts, "Conditional Sentences," p. 150.


                                                                                                              89

                           Moods and Tenses in the Protasis

General Observations

          The simple condition is, by definition, limited to the

indicative mood, for it assumes the reality of the condition. The

particle e]a<n does occur, but the key is the mood. A few examples of ei]  

with the subjunctive mood are found in the New Testament, but these are

identified as more probable conditions and discussed under that

heading. The simple condition is limited to the indicative mood in the

protasis.

          This mood may be used with any tense. The specific data for

New Testament tense usage is listed below:

                    Present tense                     = 69.0%

                    Aorist tense            = 17.5%

                    Future tense            = 6.9%

                    Perfect tense                     = 3.8%

Each of these tenses brings with it the usual verbal significance as

described in the grammars. Which one is used in a given condition

depends upon the action involved in the protasis.

          While there is no rule governing the type of tense used in any

given protasis except the desire of the author, it is clear that the

present tense is used far more than all others combined.

 

Future Indicative

          One particular combination calls for specific discussion: ei]

with the future indicative. Two things should be noted. First is its


                                                                                                              90

use in Classical Greek, especially by the poets, in threatening or

warning (minatory or monitory) statements. Second is its use in

emphatic assertions or oaths.

 

Minatory or Monitory Use

          Gildersleeve has called attention to this special use of the

simple condition. Working within the framework of a comparison between

ei] and the future indicative and e]a<n with the subjunctive, he first

notes that the latter is by far more frequent. The distinction between

the two is seen

      . . . whenever it is important to distinguish continued from

     concentrated action, whenever it is important to distinguish over-

     lapping from priority, e]a<n with the subjunctive is preferred.

He continues,

     Now the neglect of this distinction in ei] with the future

     indicative shows a certain coldness, a certain indifference; and

     this added to the general rigor of the logical condition, which

     faces fact in all its grimness, gives a stern, minatory, prophetic

     tone to the future indicative, which commentators and grammarians

      have noticed, but noticed only in passing . . . .2

          Gildersleeve then proceeds to illustrate this from the tragic

poets, showing that the device is frequently employed by them in such

settings.

          The New Testament, though, stands in contrast to the tragic

poets of Classical Greek, for there is only one example of this

 

          1 B. L. Gildersleeve, "On ei] with the Future Indicative and ean  

with the Subjunctive in the Tragic Poets," Transactions of the American

Philological Association, 7:1 (January, 1876), p. 9.

          2 Ibid., p. 9.


                                                                                                              91

construction in its pages.

      Of the New Testament instances of ei] followed by a Future (about

      twenty in number), one, 2 Tim. 2:12, illustrates the minatory or

      monitory force attributed to such clauses by [Gildersleeve].1

          The phrase under discussion, ei] a]rnhso<meqa, ka]kei?noj a]rnh<setai,

is the third line of what may be four lines of an early Christian hymn.2  

The fact is stated "in all its grimness" that "If we shall deny Him,

He also will deny us." Certainly this must be understood as a stern

warning, for eternity seems to hang in the balance. But, it should be

asked, a warning of what to whom?

          Commentators are, as usual, divided on the passage. Some seem

to imply loss of salvation resulting from a believer's turning against

his Lord and denying Him. Hendriksen's words seem to allow for this:

     When a person, because of unwillingness to suffer hardship for

     the sake of Christ and his cause, disowns the Lord ("I do not know

     the man!"), then, unless he repents, he will be disowned by the

     Lord in the great day of judgment ("I do not know you.").3

          Kent understands Paul to be speaking of professed believers in

general and, assuming that some may prove their true colors by denying

Him, warns them of their fate.4  Hiebert agrees with Kent, rejecting

the idea that this denial refers to "a temporary weakness of faith," but

 

          1 Burton, Moods and Tenses, p. 105.

          2 Homer A. Kent, Jr., The Pastoral Epistles (Chicago: Moody Press,

1958), p. 271.

          3 William Hendriksen, 1 - II Timothy and Titus (Grand Rapids:

Baker Book House, 1965), p. 259.

          4 Kent, Pastoral Epistles, p. 272.


                                                                                                              92

as the conclusion shows, to deny Him "as a permanent fact."1

          Certainly, though, Gildersleeve's identification of this

construction as one presenting grim fact in a coldly logical way aptly

describes Paul's words.

 

Emphatic Assertions

          The second and more common use of ei] with the future indicative

is in emphatic assertions or oaths. This is especially true in quotes

from the Old Testament where ei] translates the Hebrew particle Mxi.  The

four examples of this are Mark 8:12, Hebrews 3:11, 4:3 and 4:5.

Mark 8:12, ei] doqh<setai th? genea? tau<th shmei?on, is not an

"official" oath like the examples in Hebrews, but it fits the same

pattern:  "No sign shall be given to this generation." As already

indicated, Robertson identifies this as an elliptical condition lacking

the apodosis. Further, he says that this is "really aposiopesis in

imitation of the Hebrew use of im."2  Other grammarians recognize this

construction, including Winer,3 Buttmann,4 and Blass-Debrunner.5

 

          1 D. Edmund Hiebert, Second Timothy (Chicago: Moody Press, 1958),

pp. 63-64.

          2 Robertson, Word Pictures, IV, p. 331.

          3 Winer, Grammar, p. 500.

          4 Buttmann, Grammar, pp. 358-359.

          5 Blass-Debrunner, Grammar, p. 189.


                                                                                                              94

          The references in Hebrews (3:11, 4:3 and 4:5) are all quotations

from the Septuagint version of Psalm 95:11 – ei] ei]seleu<sontai ei]j th>n

kata<pausi<n mou. The Hebrew version introduces this with the particle

Mxi, whose use in oaths is a normal structure of the language.1  The

Septuagint regularly uses ei] in these situations. The Authorized

Version correctly renders 3:11 as "They shall not enter into my rest,"

while 4:3 and 4:5 are translated, "If they shall enter into my rest."

Modern versions correctly translate all of them the same way: a statement

of warning, "They shall not enter into my rest."

           Thus ei] with the indicative is used in sentences of emphatic

negation, though few of them are found in the New Testament. The

conditional particle is a straight-forward translation of the Hebrew

and is a proper Hebraism.

 

                         Moods and Tenses in the Apodosis

          There is no specific relationship between the moods and tenses

of the protasis and the apodosis in simple conditions. Robertson

summarizes this point well when he states:

      The apodosis varies very greatly. It all depends upon what one is

      after, whether mere statement, prediction, command, prohibition,

      suggestion, question. Hence the apodosis may be in the indicative

     (any tense) or the subjunctive or the imperative. There is no

      necessary correspondence in tense between protasis and apodosis.

     The variation in the mode of the apodosis has no essential bearing

      on the force of the condition.2

 

          1 E. Kautzsch, ed., Gesenius' Hebrew Grammar, revised by A. E.

Cowley (London: Oxford University Press, 1910), pp. 471-472.

          2 Robertson, Grammar, p. 1008.


                                                                                                              95

          While there is no essential correspondence between the protasis

and the apodosis, there is a preference for the indicative mood in

the apodosis. The tables in Appendix I yield the following data:

          Apodoses with indicative mood   = 205 or 67.3% of the total.

          Apodoses with imperative mood = 84 or 28.4% of the total.

          Apodoses with subjunctive mood           = 7 or 2.4% of the total.

Again, no rule may be fixed, but the distribution is most reasonable.

Protases which speak in real terms would normally imply apodoses which

also speak in real terms. But language is flexible, and all moods are

possible and do occur.

 

                            Meaning of the Simple Condition

          Now that the details of amount and construction have been

considered, the way is cleared for a consideration of the basic meaning

of the simple condition. This will cover two areas: (1) particular

and general conditions, and (2) the degree of reality implied by the

protasis.

 

                         Particular and General Conditions

          The terminology if not the concept of particular and general

conditions has entered Koine studies through the work of Goodwin, hence

his definitions will be the starting point.

 

The Position of Goodwin

          Goodwin defines particular and general thusly:

          A particular supposition refers to a definite act or to several

     definite acts, supposed to occur at some definite time (or

     times) . . . .


                                                                                                              96

          A general supposition refers indefinitely to any act or acts

      of a given class which may be supposed to occur or to have occurred

      at any time . . .1

This particular distinction is seen "in all classes of conditions,"

but in some of them it may be distinguished by construction:

          When the apodosis has a verb of present time expressing a

      customary or repeated action, the protasis may refer (in a general

     way) to any act or acts of a given class which may be supposed to

     occur at any time within the period represented in English as

     present.

          When the apodosis has a verb of past time expressing a customary

     or repeated action, the protasis may refer (in a general way) to any

     act or acts of a given class which may be supposed to have occurred

     at any time in the past.2

          The key point in the construction of the conditional sentence

is the tense of the apodosis, not the protasis. Goodwin is simply

attributing to the present and imperfect tenses their continual or

repetitive significance.

 

The Evaluation of Goodwin

          As mentioned earlier, Funk has also noted that "The present

tense in the apodosis often gives the condition a generalizing force

(indicated by ever in the translation)."3  Funk, though, simply notes it

as an observation without making it a rule of classification. In this

he follows Gildersleeve, who notes that all classes of conditional

sentences may be either general or particular, "according to the

 

          1 W. W. Goodwin, Moods and Tenses, p. 141.

          2 Ibid., pp. 141-142.

          3 Robert W. Funk, A Beginning-Intermediate Grammar of Hellenistic

Greek, 3 volumes (Missoula, Montana: The Society of Biblical Literature,

1973), II, p. 683.


                                                                                                              97

character of the apodosis."1

          Robertson rejects Goodwin's use of this concept as a means of

classification:

     This theory calls for "particular" and "general" suppositions as a

     fundamental element. This is a false step in itself. As Gilder-

     sleeve shows, each of the four classes of conditions may be parti-

     cular or general. That point has no bearing on the quality of the

     condition.2

          Does this agree with the facts of the case? Can simple

conditional sentences be particular or general, depending upon the

context as Gildersleeve and Robertson maintain? The answer, of course,

is Yes. A few examples will suffice.

          Romans 4:14 uses two perfect tenses in the apodosis of its

condition and speaks of one past historical event: the giving of the

law – ei] ga>r oi[ e]k no<mou klhrono<moi, keke<nwtai h@ pi<stij.- "for if those

who are of law are heirs, then faith has no value." This fits the

pattern of Goodwin as a particular condition.

          I Corinthians 15:2, however, uses a present tense in the apodosis

and speaks of the specific situation of the Corinthian believers and

their relationship to the gospel – di ] ou$ kai> sw<zesqe, ti<ni lo<gw

eu]hggelisa<mhn u[mi<n ei] kate<xete - "By this (gospel) you are saved, if you

hold fast to the word I preached to you." This does not agree with

Goodwin, for the present tense (sw<zesqe) should make this condition

a general one.

 

          1 B. L. Gildersleeve, "Studies in Pindaric Syntax," The American

Journal Philology, 3:4 (December, 1882), p. 435.

          2 Robertson, Grammar, pp. 1005-1006.


                                                                                                              98

          Matthew 12:26 – kai> ei] o[ stana?j to>n satana?n e]kba<llei, e]f ]

e[auto<n e]meri<sqh - "And if Satan casts out Satan, he is divided against

himself" - may be taken as a general condition, referring to any time

Satan works against himself. Yet the apodosis uses the aorist e]merisqh,

contrary to what Goodwin would predict.

          Thus the simple condition may be either particular or general

with no special significance attached to the tense of the apodosis.

Funk's point should not be overlooked, though, for the concepts of

particular and general are a legitimate part of interpretation and

translation.

 

                                      Degree of Reality

          One of the most important questions about simple conditions is:

What do they imply about the condition they state? The indicative mood

communicates objective reality, but how is that communicated and

wherein does the reality lie?

 

Review of the Grammarians

          The various grammarians approach this question in various ways,

but most have arrived at a similar position.

 

Classical Grammarians

          Goodwin stated his opinion that simple conditions are those which

imply nothing as to the fulfillment [reality] of the condition . .        ,”1

He rejects the idea that language should even have a form which implied

 

          1 Goodwin, Moods and Tenses, p. 139.


                                                                                                    99

the objective reality of a condition: "The Greek has no form implying

that a condition is or was fulfilled, and it is hardly conceivable that

any language should find such a form necessary or useful."1

          Gildersleeve agrees with Goodwin:

          The Logical Condition [simple condition] states the elements in

      question. It is used of that which can be brought to the standard

      of fact; but that standard may be for or against the truth of the

      postulate. All that the logical condition asserts is the inexorable

      connection of the two members of the sentence.2

His point is that the factuality of the postulate is limited to its

statement, for it is presented as something that can be considered as

fact but not necessarily is fact. The Classical grammarians are in

agreement on this point.

 

Koine Grammarians

          Early Koine grammarians followed this approach. Green states,

"The conditional particle ei], if with the Indicative in the protasis,

assumes the hypothesis as a fact."3  Winer reflects Gildersleeve's view

by identifying the simple condition as the "Pure Condition."4  Even

Turner, a more recent scholar, uses the general language of "simple

assumption."5

 

          1 Goodwin, Mood's and Tenses, p. 140.

          2  Gildersleeve, "Pinder," p. 435.

          3 Samuel G. Green, Handbook to the Grammar of the Greek Testament

(London: The Religious Tract Society, [1886]), p. 317.

          4 Winer, Grammar, p . 291.

          5 Turner, Syntax, p. 319.


                                                                                                              100

          More recent grammarians continue this same general approach.

Blass-Debrunner states, somewhat confusingly, "Ei] with the indicative

of all tenses denotes a simple conditional assumption with emphasis on

the reality of the assumption (not of what is being assumed): the

condition is considered 'a real case.'"1  The confusion results from

the distinction between the assumption and "what is being assumed."

The assumption corresponds to the statement, "What is being assumed"

corresponds to the situation. In Matthew 12:27, Jesus offers the

statement with an assumption that it is a real case. He assumes it

to be true. He is not, however, stating the situation as true. The

distinction Blass-Debrunner draws is between these two: the statement

and the situation.

          Dana and Mantey are clearer when they identify the simple

condition as the one that "was used when one wished to assume or to seem

to assume the reality of his premise."2  Funk expands this description:

          In a first class condition the protasis is a simple conditional

     assumption with emphasis on the reality of the assumption (but

     not on the reality of what is being assumed) [reality of statement,

     but not the situation]. It is therefore taken to be a real case

     though it may, in fact, be an unreal case [as in Matthew 12:27].

          Robertson's position is basic to this discussion, since he is

most often quoted in support of one position or another. To show the

development of his thought two statements will be given, one from the

 

          1 Blass-Debrunner, Grammar, p. 188.

          2 Dana and. Mantey, Grammar, p. 289.

          3 Funk, Grammar, II, p. 680.


                                                                                                    101

first and one from the tenth edition of his Short Grammar:

     The indicative states the condition as a fact. It may or may not

     be true in fact. The condition has nothing to do with that, but

     only with the statement. . . . This condition does assume the

     reality of the condition.1

Then, from the tenth edition:

     This condition assumes the reality of the condition. The indicative

     mode states it as a fact. The condition has nothing whatever to do

     with the actual fact or truth. It is just here that some of the

     grammars have erred in failure to distinguish clearly between the

     statement and the reality. It is the condition taken at its face

     value without any insinuations or implications. The context, of

     course, must determine the actual situation. The indicative mode

     determines only the statement.2

          It is evident in the latter statement that he is trying to avoid

the impression that he considers the simple condition one that affirms

the reality (or actuality) of the situation as an objective fact. It

does affirm the reality of the speaker's assumption or statement, i.e.,

the speaker really assumes (though he may believe otherwise) that the

condition (statement) is true. The statements in his Historical

Grammar, offered in response to Goodwin, are not as clear:

     This condition pointedly implies the fulfilment of the condition.

     It is the condition of actuality, reality, Wirklichkeit, and not

     mere "possibility" as Farrar has it . . . a la Goodwin. This is

     the crux of the whole matter. Once see [sic] that the first class

     condition with the ind. implies the reality of the premise, all

     else follows naturally.3

 

          1 A. T. Robertson, A Short Grammar of the Greek New Testament

(New York: A. C. Armstrong & Son, 1908), p. 161.

          2 A. T. Robertson and W. Hersey Davis, A New Short Grammar of

the Greek Testament (New York: Harper & Brothers, 1933), p. 350.

          3 Robertson, Grammar, p. 1006.


                                                                                                    101

          It seems, then, that the grammars present a unified view

concerning the degree of reality in the simple condition: It presents

the statement of the condition as true, but without affirming any-

thing about the reality of the actual situation.

 

Review of the Problem

          The unanimous opinion of the grammarians is not reflected by

some writers and speakers who claim that the simple condition

guarantees the reality of the situation. They suggest the translation

"since," rather than "if." In English this presents the situation

as true, both in the speaker's statement and in objective fact. An

extreme, but by no means isolated example of this has already been

given: "The first class condition implies truth or reality. If . . .

and it is true."1  Sometimes Kenneth Wuest is implicated in this view

on the strength of translation such as Romans 6:5 -

     The Word "if" in the Greek is not the conditional particle of

     an unfulfilled condition. It is a fulfilled condition here, its

     meaning being, "in view of the fact."2

He did not adopt this as a uniform principle of translation, though,

and limited such renderings to places where the context justified them.

This, of course, is at the heart of the situation. There are several

passages where the reality of the statement is in keeping with the

reality of the situation. But many times it is not, e.g. Matthew 12:27.

 

          1 Jerome Moore, "Four Ways to 'Say 'If,'" The Baptist Bulletin,

45:1 (June, 1979), p. 11.

          2 Kenneth S. Wuest, Treasures From the Greek New Testament

(Grand Rapids: Wm. B. Eerdmans Publishing Company, 1957), p. 89.


                                                                                                    103

One cannot generalize from a context where this is true to all uses of

the simple condition.

 

          Objections to this view.--Several objections may be raised to

this position. First, a little mature reflection will cause one to be

cautious about agreeing with Moore and others. In his example he

claims, on the basis of a simple condition in Colossians 1:23, that

there is no need to doubt the security of anyone's salvation. This

is not supported from Scripture, for certainly the false teachers of

Acts 20:30 looked and acted like believers before their true colors were

flown. Those in I John 2:19 must have looked like believers before

they went out and demonstrated that they were not. Would Paul have

been so quick to affirm the absolute salvation of all those in the

church where he had not visited (Colossians 1:4, 9)?  Probably not.

          Second, and more significant, the pattern of translating ei]  

by "since" does not hold in all cases. James Boyer shows that Wuest

changes his translation between John 10:35 ("since") and 10:37, 38

("assuming that"), as required by context.1  John Battle has listed all

simple conditions which, in his opinion, present data in the protasis

that are contrary to fact and known to be so by the speaker.2  It is

impossible to use "since" in such verses as I Corinthians 15:13 and

 

          1 James L. Boyer, "Semantics in Biblical Interpretation,"

Grace Journal, 3:2 (Spring, 1962), p. 33.

          2 John A. Battle, Jr., "The Present Indicative in New Testament

Exegesis," unpublished Th.D. dissertation, Grace Theological Seminary,

1975, pp. 166-168.


                                                                                                    104

still maintain orthodoxy. Battle's list is impressive, and all one has

to do is insert "since" in place of "if" in the verses to realize the

error of this concept. J. Harold Greenlee shows the variety of

situations one encounters in the simple condition:

     Moreover, 2) the speaker may believe that the condition is true:

     "if they have persecuted me (and they have done so) [John 15:20a];

     or 3) he may believe that the condition is not true: "if they have

     kept my word" (but they have not done so) [John 15:20b]; or 4) he

     may be uncertain as to whether it is true: "sir, if you have

     carried him away" (she does not know whether he had or not) [John

     20:15]; or 5) the speaker may even be mistaken in his assumption:

     "if he is sleeping" (but he was in fact dead) [John 11:12].1

          Justification for the translation of e]i by "since," must come

from the context, not the condition. This is an interpretation,

not a translation.

          The correct view.--The simple condition, through the indicative

mood, offers a conditional statement presented as real. It makes no

attempt to speak to the actual situation. If the exegete will maintain

this distinction between statement and situation, then he will not err

in handling this condition. A good summary of this point of view is

found in The Bible Translator:

     When ei] with the indicative is used, it implies that the truth or

     otherwise of the condition is regarded as in principle "determined,"

     i.e. is represented as a fact (although the speaker does not commit

     himself as to whether he believes the condition is true or not.2

 

          1 J. Harold Greenlee, "'If' in the New Testament," The Bible 

Translation, 13:1 (January, 1962), p. 40.

          2 John Kinje, Jr., "Greek Conditional Sentences," The Bible

Translator, 13:4 (October, 1962), p. 223.


                                                                                                              105

                        Translation of the Simple Condition

          How, then, should the simple condition be translated? The

uniform rule of all grammarians surveyed is to use the English conditional

construction, "if." All major English versions so translate this

condition. Should one want to paraphrase the concept, then the phrase,

"If, as I am assuming . . ." might be employed. The statement of the

simple condition may be in accord with the reality of the situation,

it may be contrary to it, or it may be unknown. All that can be said

is that the speaker is presenting the condition as true in his

statement.


 

 

 

                                      CHAPTER III

 

                THE CONTRARY TO FACT CONDITION

                                      Introduction

                                      The Concept

          The simple condition states the matter directly by assuming it

to be true. This, as has been discussed, is an assumption of reality.

But the assumption can also work the opposite way. The speaker can

present the situation and assume it to be false or contrary to fact.

Such a condition is termed the Contrary to Fact condition and is the

subject of this chapter.

 

                                  The Construction

          These conditions follow a standardized construction:  ei] with

a past (augmented) tense in the indicative mood in the protasis, and

another past (augmented) verb in the apodosis, usually with a@n. This is

as would be expected, for both the simple condition and the contrary to

fact condition are making definite statements; the former assumes them

to be true, the latter false. Robert W. Funk describes them so:

          The assumption is taken to be untrue in the protasis of a second

     class condition [contrary to fact]; it is considered an unreal case

     (whether it is, in fact, is another matter). The conclusion

      follows from the premise.

          The protasis consists of ei] plus a past (augmented) tense of

       the indicative; the apodosis also has a past tense of the indicative,

       usually with a@n.1

 

          1 Robert W. Funk, A Beginning-Intermediate Grammar of Hellenistic

Greek, 3 vols. (Missoula, Montana: The Society of Biblical Literature,

1973), II, p. 681.

                                                    106
                                                                                                              107

In this format the use of the imperfect tense in both clauses refers to

present or past time, and that of the aorist to past time only. This

basic scheme is the same as that of Robertson,1 Winer,2 and Goodwin.3

Blass-Debrunner recognizes these general principles, but does not

relate the condition to time: "The tense (imperfect, aorist, plu-

perfect . . .) retains its Aktionsart; the imperfect is temporally

ambiguous."4

 

                         List of Contrary to Fact Conditions

          Appendix II gives a Listing of the contrary to fact conditions

in the New Testament. There are some apparent exceptions. Buttmann

lists four which he feels should be classed as contrary to fact condi-

tions even though they use present tenses: John 8:39, 14:28; Luke 17:6

and Hebrews 11:15. He calls them exceptions to the rule.5

          John 8:39.—ei] te<kna tou?  ]Abraa<m e]ste, ta> e@rga tou?    ]Abqaa<m

poiei?te (if you were Abraham's children, then you would do the works

 

          1 A. T. Robertson, A Grammar of the Greek New Testament in the

Light of Historical Research (Nashville: Broadman Press, 1934), p. 1013.

          2 G. B. Winer, A Grammar of the Idiom of the New Testament, 7th

edition, revised by Gottlieb Lunemann, translated by J. H. Thayer

(Andover, Massachusetts: Warren F. Draper, Publisher, 1893), p. 291.

          3 W. W. Goodwin, Syntax of Moods and Tenses (Boston: Ginn and

Company, 1893), p. 147.

          4 Friedrich Blass and Albert Debrunner, A Greek Grammar of the

New Testament and Other Early Christian Literature, translated and revised

by Robert W. Funk (Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1961), p. 182.

          5 Alexander Buttmann, A Grammar of New Testament Greek, translated

and edited by J. H. Thayer (Andover: Warren F. Draper, Publisher, 1873),

pp. 224-225.


                                                                                                              108

of Abraham). Buttmann observes that

      Most of the interpreters and editors, indeed, have taken offence

      at this reading [e@ste in John 8:39], and have adopted into the

      text instead the very weakly-attested h@te (and thus restored the

     construction to the ordinary form), explaining to themselves the

     origin of este in various ways . . . .1

Este is supported by x, B, D, and L.    ]Epoiei?te is supported by

B, D, E, F, and G.2  Westcott and Hort have present tenses in

both the protasis and apodosis,3 and the United Bible Societies' text

has the imperfect in the apodosis.4 The question, then, is not

e@ste versus h@te, but e]poiei?te instead of poiei?te.

          There seems to be little or no support for Buttmann's claim

that this represents a contrary to fact condition, for the present

tense in the protasis affirms Christ's assumption that His listeners

were Abraham's children . The imperfect indicates that He expresses

doubt as to their ability to prove it. This is the view of Godet.5

Such an interperetation makes this a mixed condition. The protasis

is that of a simple condition, and the apodosis that of a contrary to

fact condition.

 

          1 Buttmann, Grammar., p. 225.

          2 W. Robertson Nicoll, ed., The Expoisiton'is Greek Testament

(Grand Rapids: Wm. B. Eerdmans Publishing Co., 1967), I, p. 778.

          3 Brooke Foss Westcott and Fenton John Anthony Hort, The New

Testament in the Original Greek (New York: The Macmillan Company, 1941),

p. 208.

          4 Kurt Aland, et. at., eds., The Greek New Testament (London:

United Bible Societies, 1966), p. 359.

          5 Frederick Louis Godet, Commentary on the Gospel of John, 2 vols.

(Grand Rapids: Zondervan Publishing House, n.d., reprint of 1893 edition),

II, p. 112.


                                                                                                              109

          John 14:28.—ei] h]gapa?te me, e]xa<rhte a@n (if you loved me, you would

have rejoiced). Although Buttmann claims that there is manuscript

evidence for a present tense in this condition, neither he nor anyone

else gives the data for it.

          Luke 17:6.—ei] e@xete pi<stin w[j ko<kon sina<pewj, e]le<gete a@n (if

you had faith as small as a mustard seed, you could say). Here the

present e@xete is supported by x, A, B, L, X and others, while the

imperfect ei@xete shows up in D and the rest of the Byzantine manuscript

tradition.1  This, like John 8:39, is in reality a mixed condition.2

          Hebrews 11:15.—kai> ei] me>n e]kei<nhj e]mnhmo<neuon a]f ] h$j e]ce<bhsan

ei#xon a@n kairo>n a]naka<myai (if they had been remembering the country they

had left, they would have had opportunity to return). The only

significant problem is the presence of mnhmoneu?ousin in the apodosis

instead of e]mnhmo<neuon. The evidence for this present tense is so

slight, though, that it is only mentioned in a footnote in Lange's

Commentary.3  Thus this is taken as a regular contrary to fact condition.

Buttmann's apparent exceptions, then, are either non-existent or are

to be considered mixed conditions.

 

          1 Nicoll, Testament, I, p. 592.

          2 R. C. H. Lenski, The Interpretation of St. Luke's Gospel

(Minneapolis: Augsburg Publishing House, 1964), p. 867.

          3 John Peter Lange, editor, Commentary on the Holy Scriptures,

24 volumes reprinted in 12 (Grand Rapids: Zondervan Publishing House,

1960), XI, p. 187.


                                                                                                              110

                               Significance of the Tense

          The mood employed in the contrary to fact conditions is the

indicative. The only variety comes in the tenses used, and these are

limited to the augmented ones: imperfect, aorist and pluperfect.

 

                                    The Imperfect Tense

          The basic significance of the imperfect tense is to designate

durative or repeated action in past time.1  This tense may appear in both

parts of the conditional sentence, or in either part in combination with

the other augmented tenses.

 

Imperfect in Protasis and Apodosis

          When the imperfect is used in both the protasis and apodosis,

it implies that the condition and conclusion both involve durative acts.

The time of the actions, though, is present, rather than past. Robertson

states this as a general rule of these conditions: "An unfulfilled condi-

tion about the present time was expressed in terms of the imperfect ind."2

Burton rejects this as an absolute rule, claiming that the time involved

must be determined from the context: "The Imperfect denotes continued

action; the Aorist a simple fact; the Pluperfect completed action.

The time is implied in the context, not expressed by the verb."3 This

 

          1 H. E. Dana and Julius R. Mantey, A Manual Grammar of the Greek

New Testament (New York: The Macmillan Company, 1966), p. 186.

          2 Robertson, Grammar, p. 1013.

          3 Ernest DeWitt Burton, Syntax Moods and Tenses in New

Testament Greek (Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1897), p. 103.


                                                                                                    111

is the more applicable view, for even Robertson notes that in Hebrews

11:15 the imperfect is used of continual action, but in past, not

present time.1  The equation of present time with the imperfect tense,

while not an absolute rule, does fit most of the examples in Appendix II.

Westcott summarizes:

          In this case the hypothetic unfulfilled [contrary to fact]

     condition and the consequence of its non-fulfillment are both

      regarded (a) generally as present or (b), if not as present, as

     continuous and not definitely complete in a specific incident.2

          This combination is the most frequent (17 examples) type of

contrary to fact conditions, and a glance at those listed will confirm

Westcott's generalization. The actions viewed are considered continual

acts, and in the present time in most cases. The list of examples

could be expanded at the expense of the pluperfect, for this tense

can be treated as a real imperfect. Both Westcott3 and Robertson4

recognize this. The examples in Appendix II conform to verb structure,

not usage, so such conditions are listed as pluperfects.

 

Imperfect in the Protasis Only

          Since the aorist tense is more frequent in the apodosis than the

pluperfect (22 examples as opposed to 9), the examples considered will

 

          1 A. T. Robertson and W. Hersey Davis, A New Short Grammar of the

Greek Testament (New York: Harper & Brothers, 1933), p. 352.

          2 Brooke Foss Westcott, The Epistle to the Hebrews (London:

Macmillan and Co., 1889), p. 112.

          3 Ibid., p. 113.

          4 Robertson, Grammar, p. 1015.


                                                                                                              112

be the imperfect-aorist combination. Again, Westcott: "The hypothetic

unfulfilled [contrary to fact] condition is regarded as continuous

and not definitely complete in the past, while the consequence of its

non-fulfillment is specific and past."1 The imperfect in the protasis

emphasizes continual or durative action while the aorist in the apodosis

indicates a specific action.

          The New Testament has four examples of this imperfect-aorist

combination, all of them in John's Gospel: 11:21, 11:32, 14:28 and 18:30.

In 11:21 (ei] h#n w$de ou]k a@n a]pe<qanen o[ a]delfo<j mou) Martha's sorrowful

statement illustrates these two ideas. The presence of Jesus, considered

in a durative way, would have prevented the specific act of Lazarus'

death. In 14:28 (ei] h]gapa?te< me e]xa<rhte a@n) the imperfect protasis

implies failure on the part of the disciples to be loving Jesus as they

ought to at that time ("If you loved me"). The aorist in the apodosis

points to the expected but lacking joy at His statement of return to the

Father. Robertson explains this in some detail.2 18:30 (ei] mh> h#n ou$toj

kako>n poiw?n, ou]k a@n soi paredw<kamen au]to<n) follows the same pattern, for

the imperfect h#n in the protasis refers to the continual character of

Jesus as perceived by His accusers, and the aorist paredw<kamen refers

to the specific, and historically past act of delivering Him to Pilate.

 

          1 Westcott, Hebrews, p. 117.

          2 A. T. Robertson, Word Pictures in the New Testament, 6 vols.

(Nashville: Broadman Press, 1930), VI, p. 256.


                                                                                                              113

Imperfect in the Apodosis Only

          The combination of aorist in the protasis and imperfect in the

apodosis is one where "The hypothetic unfulfilled [contrary to fact]

condition is placed as a definite incident in the past, while the

result of the non-fulfillment is regarded as continuous in the present."1

Westcott translates Hebrews 4:8 (ei] kate<pausen . . . ou]k a@n e]la<lei) as

"if rest had been given at the entrance into Canaan, God would not have

continued to speak as He does now."2  John 15:22—ei] mh> h#lqon kai>

e]le<lhsa au]toi?j, a[maqti<an ou]k ei@xosan--("if I had not come and spoken to

them, they would not have had sin") combines an aorist in the protasis

with an imperfect apodosis, placing the protasis in the past and the

apodosis in the present, as Lenski explains.3

 

                                          The Aorist Tense

          The basic significance of the aorist tense is to denote "an action

simply as an event, without in any sense defining the manner of its occur-

rence."4 Robertson terms this the basic tense of the language and says

"A statement in the indicative would naturally be in the aorist unless

there is reason to put it in some other tense, and so of the other modes."5

 

          1 Westcott, Hebrews, p. 113.

          2 Ibid., p. 113.

          3 R. C. H. Lenski, The Interpretation of St. John's Gospel

(Minneapolis: Augsburg Publishing House, 1961), p. 1060.

          4 Dana and Mantey, Grammar, p. 194.

          5 Robertson and Davis, Shorter Grammar, p. 137.


                                                                                                              114

Aorist in the Protasis and Apodosis

          The general concept of the aorist tense continues in the

contrary to fact conditions. When used in both the protasis and apodosis

it speaks of "a past and completed result which would have ensued if

the unfulfilled condition had been realized."1  Westcott further

emphasizes the past time concept by describing the aorist-aorist form of

this condition as one where "The hypothetic unfulfilled [contrary to

fact] condition and the result of the non-fulfillment are regarded as

definite incidents wholly within the past."2  In Classical Greek

conditions the aorist could refer to events in present time, but this

has not carried over into the Koine.3

          The New Testament contains nine examples of this construction.

There are two sets of parallel passages (Matthew 24:22 - Mark 13:20

and Matthew 11:21 - Luke 10:13).  Romans 9:29 is a quote from the

Septuagint.  Westcott illustrates his position by translating I Corin-

thians 2:8 (ei] e@gnwsan . . . ou]k a@n e]stau<rwsan) as "if at the crisis of

their trial they had known . . . they would not have crucified."4 The

phrase "crisis of their trial" is reading too much into the aorist, for

 

          1 Westcott, Hebrews, p. 111.

          2 Ibid., p. 113.

          3 Goodwin, Moods and Tenses, p. 151

          4 Westcott, Hebrews, p. 113.


                                                                                                              115

it simply denotes an event without specifying anything about the action,

especially durative or punctiliar characteristics. But the actions

are both restricted to past time by this tense in the protasis and

apodosis of this condition.

          Of the examples listed in Appendix II, all are referring to past

events with the possible exception of Matthew 24:22. But here the

aorist indicative is used with its normal force, for the point of view

is that prophetic judgments are past. This is in keeping with "the

genius of prophecy."1

 

Aorist in Either the Protasis or the Apodosis

          The specific references and discussion given above regarding

the aorist-imperfect combinations may be repeated here. Each of these

examples follows the general rule already stated: The aorist, whether

in the protasis or apodosis, considers the event simply as an act in

past time without indicating anything about how that act was carried

out. This contrasts with the imperfect which states continual

action in the present time (usually).

      

                                  The Pluperfect Tense

          Robertson calls the pluperfect or past perfect a "luxury in

Greek," noting that its use in the New Testament is "current, but not

common."2 As a tense it emphasizes a blend of aorist and imperfect

 

          1 Nicoll, Testament, I, p. 293.

          2 Robertson, Grammar, p. 903.


                                                                                                              116

concepts:

     As the present perfect is a blending in idea of the aoristic

     (punctiliar) and the durative present (a sort of durative aoristic

     present combined), so the past perfect is a blend of the aorist and

     the imperfect in idea. It is continuance of the completed state in

     past time up to a prescribed limit in the past.1

          Though the usual form of the contrary to fact condition utilizes

the aorist, the pluperfect sometimes appears. Eight examples of this

tense in either the protasis or apodosis or both are given in Appendix

II. Again, these examples are listed by form, not use.

          I John 2:19 may serve to illustrate the distinction between the

aorist and the pluperfect (ei] h#san . . . memenh<keisan a@n), "if they

were . . . they would have remained." Westcott identifies this verse as

one "where the pluperfect suggests a continuous state limited at a point

in the past."2 This certainly fits the context of this verse. Since

the important detail involves the time element, and the pluperfect

as well as the aorist both indicate actions in the past, no further

discussion of the pluperfect will be given.

 

                The Use of a@n in Contrary to Fact Conditions

          One of the key characteristics of the contrary to fact condition

is its use of a@n in the apodosis. This particle usually appears, but

there are a significant number of exceptions. Robertson, in fact,

 

          1 Robertson, Grammar, p. 903.

          2 Westcott, Hebrews, p. 112.


                                                                                                              116

rejects a@n as an essential part of any conditional sentence.1  What,

then, is the situation of this particle?

 

                                 The Classical Usage

          Since Buttmann notes that the "N.T. writers have in the main

adhered strictly to the grammatical model" for this condition, it seems

reasonable to begin with that usage.2 Goodwin states the form:

“ . . . the past tenses of the indicative are used in both protasis and

apodosis, and the apodosis contains the adverb a@n.3 Only certain,

specific exceptions are permitted:

          A peculiar form of potential indicative without a@n consists of

      an infinitive depending on the imperfect of a verb of

     propriety, or possibility, like e@dei, xrnh< or e]xrh<n, ei]ko>j h#n, or

     proshke<n.4

All other forms of this condition use a@n in the apodosis.

 

                                 The Koine Usage

          As with other points of grammar and syntax, the Koine has

moved from the Classical usage in the case of a@n. Although the

sampling represented in the New Testament is small compared to all of

Koine literature, most of which has been lost, enough representation is

given to offer some detailed observations.

 

          1 Robertson, Grammar, p. 1007.

          2 Buttmann, Grammar, p. 224.

          3 Goodwin, Moods and Tenses, p. 147.

          4 Ibid., p. 151-152.


                                                                                                              117

Verses Omitting a@n

          Where does a@n occur and where does it not?  Moulton states that

there are forty-two occurrences of a@n with imperfect, aorist and plu-

perfect indicatives in the apodoses of contrary to fact conditions.1

Since he only states the number and gives no specific references, cross-

checking is impossible. Of the forty-nine contrary to fact conditions

listed in Appendix II, only ten do not have a@n in the apodosis: Matthew

26:24; Mark 14:21; John 9:33, 15:22, 15:24, 18:36, 19:11; Acts 26:32;

Romans 7:7 and Revelation 20:15. This is not an impressively long list,

but sufficient to show that such absence is more than an accidental

phenomenon. Roberts adds to the list by listing the following verses

which omit a@n in some manuscripts: John 8:19, 9:41; Acts 18:14; Hebrews

4:8 and 11:15.2  Unfortunately, he does not give any indication of the

manuscript evidence, and this author was unable to identify the variants.

 

Grammatical Observations

          The grammars recognize that Koine Greek exhibits the absence of

a@n far more frequently than does Classical Greek. Burton simply notes

this fact in passing,3 while Buttmann states:

 

          1 J. H. Moulton, A Grammar of New Testament Greek. Volume I:

Prolegomena, third edition (Edinburgh: T. & T. Clark, 1908), p. 166.

          2 J. W. Roberts, "The Use of Conditional Sentences in the Greek

New Testament as compared with Homeric, Classical and Helenistic Uses,"

unpublished Ph.D. dissertation, The University of Texas, 1955, p. 184.

          3 Burton, Moods and Tenses, p. 104.


                                                                                                              119

      . . . such an omission is allowable only in fixed cases, which

     are observed also in the N.T., and may be reduced to the four

     classes that follow.

          That is to say, the omission of an occurs:

     a) When a@n has already been expressed previously in the same connec-

     tion with another predicate. This instance, which often occurs in

     the classics and is founded in the nature of the case, is accidentally

     not to be met with in the text of the N.T.; but it occurs once

     only as a various reading of cod. A in Luke xvii. 6.

     b) When the predicate (or the copula) to which it belongs is also

     dropped, as I Cor. xii. 19 . . . .

     c) Where the apodosis contains such a predicative term as e@dei,

      kalo<n h#n, h]du<nato etc        

     d) Lastly, a@n is dropped for rhetorical reasons: where, though the

     fact itself is impossible or improbable, the orator in the vivacity

     of his thought desires to represent it as actually having occurred,

     or at least, as almost taken place.l

Blass-Debrunner notes that "the addition of a@n to the apodosis is no

longer obligatory."2  Robertson summarizes the discussion:

      Sometimes, again, a@n was not employed because the context made it

      plain that it is the second-class condition, as in Jo. 15:22 . .      .

      So also as to verse 24. In the same way the absence of a@n with ou]k  

      ei@xej in Jo. 19:11 still leaves it clear by the following clause

      that we have a second class condition. So again verbs of fitness

      or propriety like kalo<n h#n (Matt. 26:24) and ou] kaqh<ken (Acts 26:32),

      and obligation like e@dei (Matt. 23:23).3

          Where does this leave the question? First of all, the omission

of a@n is admitted by all grammarians. The particle is not essential

for the formation of the contrary to fact condition. Second, there are

suggested rules regarding its absence. Buttmann lists four, Robertson

two. Do the observed examples fit these rules? Matthew 26:24, Mark

 

          1 Buttmann, Grammar, pp. 225-226.

          2 Blass-Dehrunner, Grammar, p. 182.

          3 Robertson, Shorter Grammar, p. 352.


                                                                                                    120

14:21, John 9:33 and Acts 26:32 agree with the rules of both Buttmann

and Robertson. John 15:22 and 24 surrender to Robertson's rule that

context makes clear what condition is intended. This leaves John 19:11,

Romans 7:7 and Revelation 20:15. Buttmann explains Romans 7:7 as an

omission for rhetorical reasons, but does not explain the other two.1

          Rather than pursue an explanatory rule for all cases, it seems

more reasonable to admit that there is no universal principle accounting

for the omission of a@n.   Though stated in another context, Robertson's

observation that "There is no principle involved in a@n, simply custom"

may well describe the situation in the New Testament.2

 

                                The Significance of a@n

          Since most of the contrary to fact conditions use a@n in the

apodosis, it is necessary to consider the significance of this particle.

Moulton puts it this way:

     The addition of a@n to an indicative apodosis produced much the

     same effect as we can express in writing by italicising "if":

     if he had anything, he gave it. Or "if he had anything, in that

     case (a@n) he gave it," alike suggest by their emphasis that the

     condition was not realized.3

          Robertson finds the New Testament in agreement with this

observation.4      @An, then, strengthens the "if" aspect of the apodosis,

 

          1 Buttmann, Grammar, p. 226.

          2 Robertson, Grammar, p. 1007.

          3 Moulton, Prolegomena, p. 200.

          4 Robertson, Grammar, p. 1014.

 


                                                                                                              121

and would naturally be superfluous when the apodosis verb contained that

significance within itself. This, then, is the basis for the grammarians

identifying certain types of verbs as ones which are used without a@n.

 

              The Meaning of the Contrary to Fact Condition

                                   General Observations

          The contrary to fact condition has been given many different

titles as grammarians have tried to encapsulate its significance:

"Condition Determined as Unfulfilled,"1 "Condition with Supposition

Contrary to Fact,"2 "Condition Contrary to the Fact,"3 and "Second

Class Condition."4  Dana and Mantey give the basic meaning of this

condition as

          The premise is assumed to be contrary to fact in this class,

     and only the past tenses of the indicative are used. As suggested

     above, this condition states a thing as if it were untrue or unreal,

     although in actual fact it may be true, as the first example below

     [Matthew 26:24] shows.5

          Goodwin presents his view:

          When the protasis states a present or past supposition, implying

     that the condition is not or was not fulfilled, and the apodosis

     expresses what would be (or would have been) the result if that

     condition were (or had been) fulfilled, the past tenses of the

     indicative are used in both protasis and apodosis, and the apodosis

     contains the adverb a@n.6

 

          1 Robertson, Shorter Grammar, p. 162.

          2 Goodwin, Moods and Tenses, p. 147.

          3 Winer, Grammar, p. 291.

          4 Robertson, Shorter Grammar, p. 351

          5 Dana and Mantey, Grammar, p. 289.

          6 Goodwin, Moods and Tenses, p. 147.

 


                                                                                                              122

          Robertson elaborates:

      The premise is assumed to be contrary to fact. The thing in itself

      may be true, but it is treated as untrue. Here again the condition

      has only to do with the statement, not with the actual fact . . . .

      Surely the ind. is the mode for positive and negative statements,

      for directness of statement and clarity of expression. But one must

      emphasize the words "statement" and "expression." The ind. does

      not go behind the face value of the record.1

The actual facts of the case, whether the supposition is true or not,

"is a more difficult matter. This idea has to be conveyed by suggestion."2

 

                                     Specific Examples

          Some examples may suffice to illustrate these concepts in

action. First, Jesus' statement to His detractors in John 5:46

represents a contrary to fact condition in present time: ei] ga>r

e]pisteu<ete Mwu*sei?, e]pisteu<ete a@n e]moi<. The statement refers to the

current state of affairs concerning the belief of the Jews, and the

imperfect tense shows. Jesus' statement assumes that they were not

believing Moses, hence they were not believing Him. It may be para-

phrased, If you were believing Moses, which you are not, then you would

be believing Me, which you are not."

          Galatians 4:15 uses aorist indicatives in both parts of the

condition, and omits a@n in the apodosis:  ei] dunato>n tou>j o]fqalmou>j

u[mw?n e]coru<cantej e]dw<kate moi. Paul is reflecting upon the Galatians'

previous attitude toward him. The contextual time is past, and the

 

          1 Robertson, Grammar, p. 1013.

          2 Ibid., p. 1014.

 


                                                                                                    123

suggested action clearly impossible. "If it were possible, which it

wasn't, you would have given my your eyes after you took them out, which

you didn't."

          Luke 7:39 is presented by Robertson as an example where the

assumption goes contrary to the actual facts: ou$toj ei] h#n o[ profh<th,

e]gi<nwsken a@n.  He points out that the Pharisee was assuming that Jesus

was not the prophet and thus ignorant of the moral nature of the woman.1  

In point of fact, Jesus was the prophet and did know about the woman.

He was not ignorant, the Pharisee was. This illustrates Robertson's

observation that the actual situation must be determined by data outside

the condition. The condition only presents the statement, not the

situation.

 

                The Translation of the Contrary to Fact Condition

                                     General Observations

          Robertson termed the contrary to fact condition a "somewhat

difficult condition."2  The difficulty to which he referred was not the

construction, which is quite regular, but the translation. It is hard

to communicate both the force of the condition (the assumption that the

condition is contrary to fact) and the tense of the verb (imperfect,

aorist or pluperfect). One of the most concise attempts at defining

the meaning and translation of this category of conditions is found in

 

          1 Robertson, Grammar, p. 1013.

          2 Ibid., p. 1012.

 


                                                                                                              124

Westcott's commentary on Hebrews. First, he explains the meaning of the

condition:

          Two main cases arise. In one (1) the protasis expressed by ei]

      with the indicative is followed by the imperfect indicative with a@n.

     The thought here is of a present or continuous result which would

      have been seen now if the unfulfilled supposition had been realized.

      In the other (II), the protasis expressed by ei] with the indicative

       is followed by the aorist indicative with a@n. The thought here is

       of a past and completed result which would have ensued if the

       unfulfilled condition had been realized.1

          Westcott obviously is dealing with the apodoses rather than

the protases, but this is where the results are stated. The key problem

in rendering the entire sentence into English is the precise statement,

not only of the supposition, but of the anticipated results. He

continues, noting some serious problems confronting the translator:

          No uniform rendering in English is able to give the exact

      force of these two different forms of expression. It has become

      common to translate (1) by if (he) had . . . (he) would . . .; and

      (II) by if (he) had . . . (he) would have . . . . But if this

      rendering is adopted, the definite negation of the fact in the

      apodosis of (I) is commonly lost or obscured, and the statement

      appears to be simply hypothetical and to suggest a possible ful-

      filment in the future. On the other hand if (I) and (II) are

      translated in the same manner, the suggestion of the present or

      continuous fact in (I) is obliterated.4

          Is Westcott's observation correct? Is it impossible to accurately

convey both aspects of the contrary to fact condition? If one is

looking for a simple translation formula into which the various parts

of the condition are inserted to find the correct English equivalent,

 

          1 Westcott, Hebrews, p. 111.

          2 Ibid., p. 112.

 


                                                                                                              125

then he will be frustrated. Such a translation formula does not exist

in this case, nor in any other situation. In some cases, the translator

may have to sacrifice either the concept of assumed negation or the

Aktionsart of the verb. But in others, each may be preserved through a

judicious choice of English phrasiology.

          Four such examples are given in Westcott's commentary on Hebrews:

Hebrews 8:4 (both protasis and apodosis = imperfect), Hebrews 4:8

(protasis = aorist, apodosis,= imperfect), John 14:28 (protasis =

imperfect, apodosis = aorist) and I Corinthians 2:8 (protasis and

apodosis = aorist). The major versions used for comparison of his

translations are the, Authorized Version, the New American Standard Bible,

the New International Version, and the Berkeley Version.

 

Hebrews 8:4

          ei] me>n ou#n h#n e]pi> gh?j, ou]d ] a}n h#n i[ereu<j

          Westcott.--"if he had been now invested with such an office . .

he would not be as he now is . . ."1

          Authorized Version.--For if he were on earth, he should not be

a priest.

          New American Standard Version.--Now if He were on earth, He

would not be a priest at all.

          New International Version.--If he were on earth, he would not be

 

          1 Westcott, Hebrews, p. 112.

 


                                                                                                              126

a priest.

          Berkeley Version.--If, then, He were still on earth, He would not

be a priest at all.

 

Hebrews 4:8

          ei] ga>r au]tou>j  ]Ihsou?j kate<pausen, ou]k a@n peri> a@llaj e]la<lei

meta> tau?ta h[me<raj

          Westcott.--"if rest had been given at the entrance into Canaan,

God would not have continued to speak as He does now . . ."1

          Authorized Version.--For if Jesus had given them rest, then

would he not afterward have spoken of another day.

          New American Standard: Bible.--For if Joshua had given them

rest, He would not have spoken of another day after that.

          New International Version.--For if Joshua had given them rest,

God would not have spoken later about another day.

          Berkeley Version.--Now, if Joshua had given them rest, God would

not have spoken of another day later on.

 

John 14:28

          ei] h]ghpa?te< me, e]xa<rhte a}n o!ti poreu<omai pro>j to<n pate<ra

          Westcott.--"if ye had now been loving me . . . ye would at the

 

          1 Westcott, Hebrews, p. 113.

 


                                                                                                              127

moment of my saying . . ."1

          Authorized Version.--If ye loved me, ye would rejoice.

          New American Standard Bible.--If you loved Me, you would have

rejoiced.

          New International Version.--If you loved me, you would be glad

that I am going to the Father.

          Berkeley Version.--If you loved me, you would be glad that I go

to the Father.

 

I Corinthians 2:8

          ei] ga>r e@gnwsan, ou]k a}n to>n ku<rion th?j do<chj e]stau<rwsan

          Westcott.--"if at the crisis of their trial they had known . . .

they would not have crucified. . . “2

          Authorized Version.--for had they known it, they would not have

crucified the Lord of glory.

          New American Standard Bible.--for if they had understood it,

they would not have crucified the Lord of Glory.

          New International Version.--for if they had [understood it], they

would not have crucified the Lord of glory.

 

          1 Westcott, Hebrews, p. 113.

          2 Ibid., p. 113.

 


 

                                                                                                              128

          Berkeley Version.--for had they understood, they would never have

crucified the Lord of glory.

 

Conclusion

          What does this comparison demonstrate? Several things; first,

the problems raised by Westcott need not interfer with an accurate

translation. English communicates a significant amount of information

by context, and that fact helps translators handle both aspects of

the contrary to fact condition. The clear implication of the context

of I Corinthians 2:8 underscores the negative assumption of the

condition. Further, the use of the English pluperfect assists this

idea, as well as reflecting the aorist verbs. Other English tenses

adequately reflect the imperfect tense, as the examples show. Westcott's

general observation accurately sums up the situation: "Each case there-

fore must be considered by itself in order that the translator may

convey the truest impression of the original with regard to the context."1

 

          1 Westcott, Hebrews, p. 112.

 


 

 

 

                                       CHAPTER IV

 

                         THE PROBABLE CONDITION

 

                                          Introduction

          The next two types of conditional sentences represent the second

half of the entire collection: the undetermined conditions. These

present their conditions as undetermined or doubtful, but with a varying

degree of possible fulfillment. The previous conditions, the simple

condition and the contrary to fact condition, enable the speaker to

communicate a definite assumption in his conditional statement. Either

he assumed it was true, or he assumed that it was not true.

          In the undetermined conditions he states it as a possibility,

not an actuality or an impossibility. This distinction is accomplished

by using the moods of possibility: the subjunctive and the optative.

"Naturally the indicative is not allowed here."1

          This large group, the undetermined conditions, may be sub-

divided into two classes which differ from each other in the degree of

possibility each expresses. This difference is found in the moods

employed in them, and it is as large as the semantical gap between

them:

      The difference therefore between the third and fourth class condi-

      tions is just that between the subj. and the opt. They are both

      modes of doubtful, hesitating affirmation, but the optative is more

 

          1 A. T. Robertson, A Grammar of the Greek New Testament in the

Light of Historical Research (Nashville: Broadman Press, 1934), p. 1004.

                                                   129


                                                           

      remote than the subj. In this type the premise is not assumed to be

      either true or untrue. The point is in the air and the cloud

      gathers round it. But there is less mist over the subj. than the

      opt.1

This chapter will focus on the third group in Robertson's classification:

those conditions employing the subjunctive mood in the protasis.

          The terminology involved in the analysis of this group of

conditional sentences has not been standardized. Robertson quotes

from different grammars, illustrating the variety found in the

literature:

      La Roche prefers "objektive Molichkeit" for the third class and

      "subjecktive Molichkeit" for the fourth class (ei] and the opt.).

      This is also the language of Winer, "objective possibility" and

       "subjective possibility." Farrar prefers the words Possibility,

       Impossibility, Slight Probability, Uncertainty. Radermacher . . .

       calls ei] with ind. "objektiv," ean with subj. "an sich objektiv,"

      ei] with past tense of ind. "Irrealitat." So it goes.2

          The list could be expanded by including the terminology

suggested by modern grammarians. Dana and Mantey provide the best

descriptive title when the call it "the more probable future condition."3

Rather than their cumbersome terms "more probable" and "less probable,"

it seems better to this author to use "probable" and "possible," the

latter being reserved for ei] with the optative. If a sentence is

either probable or possible it is obviously future. Thus the title

suggested is "The Probable Condition."

 

          1 Robertson, Grammar, pp. 1004-1005.

          2 Ibid., p. 1005.

          3 H. E. Dana and Julius R. Mantey, A Manual Grammar of the

Greek New Testament (New York: The MacMillan Company, 1966), p. 290.

 


                                                                                                              131

                         Analysis of the Probable Condition

          The probable condition is the second most frequent conditional

sentence in the New Testament and certainly the most debated. While

grammarians generally agree on its basic form, they continue to debate

its meaning in terms of implication (degree of probability or

vividness), application (particular or general) and extent (should it

include ei] with the future indicative). These and other matters will be

considered below. The specific analysis of this condition will involve

the particles and verb forms employed in both the protasis and apodosis.

 

                                          The Protasis

          The general rule regarding the formation of this condition is

well recognized: "The protasis is usually expressed by e]a<n (or a@n) with

the Subjunctive; the apodosis by the Future Indicative or by some other

form referring to future time."1 In a few examples ei], rather than e]a<n,

is used with the subjunctive.2  The discussion of the protasis, then,

begins with the particles.

 

@An in the Protasis

          As indicated in Appendix III, a@n in the protasis is limited to

the Gospel of John--5:19, 13:20, 16:23 and 20:23 (2 examples). In

addition to these verses, Moulton and Geden list John 12:32; Acts 2:45,

         

          l Ernest DeWitt Burton, Syntax of Moods and Tenses in New Testa-

ment Greek (Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1897), p. 104.

          2 Robertson, Grammar, p. 1017.

 


                                                                                                              132

4:35 and 9:2 as other examples of this construction.1  However, John 13:32

and Acts 9:2 read e]a<n in current critical texts, while Acts 2:45 and 4:35

are identified by Robertson as the "Regular Greek idiom for comparative

clauses with a@n and imperfect indicative corresponding precisely with

the three proceeding imperfects (Robertson, Grammar, p. 967)."2

          The use of a@n then, in these conditions is limited to the

Gospel of John. While interesting, this observation does not interfere

with the basic meaning of the condition. Indeed, a@n is technically

part of all the others, for e]a<n is simply ei] and a@n.3

 

Ei] in the Protasis

          Ei] does occur in the protasis of the probable condition with

verbs in the subjunctive mood. While unusual, it is not unexpected,

for Koine Greek represents a stage in the development of the language

in which the absolute distinctions between ei] and e]a<n were beginning to

weaken. "Indeed, as we sometimes have e]a<n and the fut. ind, in the first

class condition, so we occasionally meet ei] and the subj. in the third

class [probable] condition."4 As might be expected, the examples are

few; only eight are listed in Appendix III. Most of these passages may

be questioned on textual grounds.

 

          1 W. F. Moulton and A. S. Geden, eds., A Concordance to the Greek

Testament (Edinburgh: T. & T. Clark, 1967), p. 55.

          2 A. T. Robertson, Word Pictures in the New Testament, 6 volumes

(Nashville: Broadman Press, 1930), III, p. 39.

          3 Robertson, Grammar, p. 1007.

          4 Ibid., p. 1017.

 


                                                                                                    133

          Moulton finds only one absolute example:

      The latter [ei] with the subjunctive] occurs only in I Co 145,

     where the peculiar phrase accounts for it . . . . We should hardly

      care to build much on Rev 115.  In Lk 913 and Phil 311 we probably

      have deliberative subjunctives, "unless we are to go and buy," and

      "if after all I am to attain . . . to apprehend."1

Burton offers his opinion:

          For the few New Testament instances there is possibly in each

     case a special reason. Thus in Luke 9:13 there is probably a

      mixture of a conditional clause and a deliberative question: unless

      indeed—are we to go? i.e., unless indeed we are to go. In I Cor.

      14:5 and I Thess. 5:10 a preference for the more common ei] mh< and

      e]a<nte . . . e]a<nte over the somewhat unusual e]a<n mh< and e]a<nte . . .  

      e]a<nte may have led to the use of the former in spite of the fact

     that the meaning called for a Subjunctive . . . . It is doubtful,

     however, whether the discovery of any difference in force between ei]  

     with the Subjunctive and say with the Subjunctive in these latter

     passages is not an over-refinement.2

          Perhaps Burton was thinking of Winer when he wrote the last

sentence, for Winer does find a distinction between the two constructions:

      The distinction between ei] with the Subjunctive and ean or an is

      thus defined . . .: ei] puts the condition simply, but when used ,

      with the Subjunctive represents it as depending on the result; e]a<n  

      also does the latter, but less decisively, inasmuch as the a@n

      represents the condition as dependent on accidental circumstances,

      if anyhow or perhaps.3

Winer seeks to apply this to several statements taken from Classical

Greek. He notes that in the latter, i.e. Byzantine authors, "a fixed

distinction between ei] with the Subj. and the same particle with the

Ind., cannot be traced . . . ."4 His conclusion: ". . . it is uncertain

 

          1 J. H. Moulton, A Grammar of New Testament Greek. Volume 1:

Prolegomena, third edition (Edinburgh: T. & T. Clark, 1908), p. 187.

          2 Burton, Moods and Tenses, p. 105.

          3 Winer, Grammar, p. 295.

          4 Ibid., p. 295.

 


                                                                                                              134

whether Paul had in view the nice discrimination specified above."1

Winer and Burton thus come to the same conclusion as Robertson: "The

true explanation is only possible by approach from the Greek standpoint.

And that is by the mode, not by ei] or e]a<n."2  This, then, is where the

matter rests.

 

The Tenses Used in the Protasis

Introductory Concepts

          Before discussing the specific examples of the New Testament

it will be advantageous to survey the significance of the various tenses

in the subjunctive mood.

 

          The Relationship of Tense to Time.--The concept of tense

deals with the action of the verb under two headings: aspect and time.

Aspect refers to the way the action is stated, which may be undefined

(aorist), continual (present, imperfect) or completed (perfect). It is

this characteristic which is dominant, for "time is but a minor

consideration in the Greek tenses.”3  Others agree: "One must dismiss

all notion of time if he wishes to understand the Greek verb."4  "Even

in the indicative the time element is subordinate to the kind of action

 

          1 Winer, Grammar, p. 295.

          2 Robertson, Grammar, p. 1007.

          3 Dana and. Mantey, Grammar, p. 171. Italics theirs.

          4 A. T. Robertson and W. Hersey Davis, A New Short Grammar

the Greek Testament (Baker Book House, 1977 reprint of 1933 edition),

p. 293.

 


                                                                                                              135

expressed."1

          Greek verb tenses are employed to describe the action involved

in terms of aspect rather than time. All aspects of action may occur at

any time.

 

          The Relationship of Tense to Mood.--Mood is the term used to

describe the relationship of the action of the verb to reality. The

indicative mood affirms the reality of the action described. The subjunc-

tive, optative and imperative moods present the action as "objectively

possible," "subjectively possible," and "volitionally possible,"

respectively.2  The subjunctive mood, of course, is the important one in

light of this study. "if [the action] is viewed as contingent upon

certain existing and known conditions--being objectively possible--the

subjunctive is used."3  This is the situation with the probable

condition. It is stated as a possibility or probability without any

implication about its actuality or impossibility.

          How does the tense relate to the mood of a verb? The main

concept of tense is aspect of the action described, and each mood may

express each aspect without regard to time. Potential moods must, by

definition, refer to an action yet unrealized, i.e. future. And that

concept is uniquely common to all the moods.4

 

          1 Robertson, Grammar, p. 825.

          2 Dana and Mantey, Grammar, p. 166.

          3 Ibid.,  p. 166.

          4 Robertson, Shorter Grammar, p. 293.

 


                                                                                                              136

          The Relationship of Tense to Time.--Absolute time can only be

assigned to an action if it is a real entity. Only then may it be spoken

of as past, present or future. Absolute time, then, may be applied to

those actions described by the indicative mood only. Potential moods

describe actions not yet realized, hence no absolute time references may

be assigned to them. "The time element is entirely absent from the

potential moods."1 Any concept of time connected with a subjunctive verb

will be relative, implied by the context. There is no time in the

subjunctive.

          These concepts are recognized by all grammarians. Burton, for

example, discusses them in terms of the three main tenses:

          The Present of the Dependent Moods is used to represent an

     action in progress or as repeated. It may be altogether timeless,

     the action being thought of without reference to the time of its

     occurrence; or its time, as past, present, or future, may be

     involved in the function of the mood, or may be indicated by the

     context.

 

          The Aorist of the Dependent Moods represents the action expressed

     by the verb as a simple event or fact, with reference either to its

     progress [or lack thereof] or to the existence of its result . . . .

          The time of the action, if indicated at all, is shown, not by

     the tense, but by some fact outside of it.

          The Perfect of the Dependent Moods is used of completed action.

      As in the Indicative, the thought may be directed both to the action

      and its result, or only to the result. The time of the action is

      indicated, as in the Present and Aorist, not by the tense but by the

      context or by the function of the mood.2

          The statistics indicate that the New Testament prefers the

three protasis tenses in this order: Aorist Subjunctive = 177 examples,

          1 Dana and Mantey, Grammar, p. 167.

          2 Burton, Moods and Tenses, pp. 46-48.

 


                                                                                                              137

Present Subjunctive = 105 examples, and Perfect Subjunctive = 7 examples.

This is what one would expect from this "aorist-loving language."1 The

aorist is preferred by almost two to one over the present, with the

perfect almost disappearing from sight.

 

Tenses Employed in the Protasis

          The Present Tense.--The present tense describes the action of

the verb in terms of continual or linear action. The use of this

tense in the protasis of a probable condition states the condition or

hypothesis as a linear or progressive action. The examples in the

New Testament should be seen in this light. Matthew 8:2, for example,

presents the leper as conditioning his healing upon the continual

attitude of Jesus toward him, perhaps speaking to his abiding character

rather than a changeable aspect of His will:  e]a<n qe<lhj, du<nasai me

kaqari<sai ("if you are willing, you are able to cleanse me"). Jesus was

referring to His continual ministry and Messianic claims when He stated

in John 5:31:  e]a<n e]gw> marturw? peri> e]mautou?,  h[ marturi<a mou ou]k e@stin

a]lhqh<j.  Paul speaks of the regular actions of the church when members

have legal problems with other believers in the same tense:  biwtika> me>n

ou#n krih<ria e]a<n e@xhte . . . tou<touj kaqi<zete (I Corinthians 6:4).

Consideration of the mood of the protasis throws a significant amount

of light upon the nature of the statement, light which the English often

fails to reflect.

 

          1 Robertson, Grammar, p. 831.

 


                                                                                                              138

          The Aorist Tense.--The aorist tense is used to present the fact

of an action without defining anything about it either in terms of aspect

or time. "Action may be regarded as simple, undefined (aoristic,

a-o]ri<stoj, from a]ori<zw, 'I do not define') action. The common term for

this is punctiliar action."1  Chamberlain's statement introduces a

misconception, for the term "punctiliar" does define the action. It

would be better to state it as undefined and leave it at that. "The

aorist denotes an action simply as an event, without in any sense

defining the manner of its occurrence."2  It communicates neither a

specific aspect (punticiliar or continual) nor a specific time (past,

present or future). It merely states the action.

          This distinction is maintained in the probable condition.

Matthew 5:46, for example, simply presents the act of love on the

part of Jesus' listeners without specifying anything about that act:

e]a<n ga>r a]gaph<shte tou>j a]gapw?ntaj u[ma?j, ti<na misqou> e@xete; ("For if

you love those who are loving you, what reward do you have?").

          A better way of seeing the present contrasted with the aorist

is to consider several verses which utilize both types of verbs. First,

Matthew 21:21 uses a present and an aorist subjunctive in the protasis,

both with a single particle e]a<n:  e]a<n e@xhte pi<stin kai> mh> diakriqh<te ("if

you have faith and do not doubt"). Lenski compares these two verbs so:

 

          1 Wiiam Douglas Chamberlain, An Exegetical Grammar of the Greek

New Testament (New York: The MacMillan Company, 1952), p. 67.

          2 Dana and Mantey, Grammar, p. 194.

 


                                                                                                              139

     The first verb is a present subjunctive, for to have faith is a

     continuous activity, the second verb is an aorist subjunctive, for

     the doubt deals with the single act regarding which hesitation

     occurs. For the moment the doubt blocks the faith and prevents

     the act faith should accomplish.1

Here Lenski, like others, misses the point of the non-specific meaning

of the aorist and attributes the concept of singularlity to it. Perhaps

Broadus comes closer to the concept with his rendering of "undoubting

faith."2  Jesus does speak of their faith as a continual thing and

states their doubt as an action, nothing more.

          I Corinthians 14:24 uses the same combination of tenses:

e]a<n de> pa<ntej profhteu<wsin, ei]se<lqh de< tij a@pistoj h} i]diw<thj,

e]le<gxetai.  ("but if all prophesy and an unbeliever or an uninstructed person

comes it, he is convicted"). Here the two actions are presented, the

first as a regular, continual one, the second as an undefined one. The

context obviously assigns an individual, particular meaning to ei]se<lqh,

but the aorist merely presents the action. Robertson and Plummer

translate the protasis as "Whereas, if all should be prophesying, and

there should come in some unbeliever or ungifted person."3  Lenski is

 

          1 R. C. H. Lenski, The Interpretation of St. Matthew's Gospel

(Minneapolis: Augsburg Publishing House, 1961), p. 824.

          2 John A. Broadus, Commentary on the Gospel of Matthew, volume I

of An American Commentary on the New Testament, Alvah Hovey, ed.

(Philadelphia: The American Baptist Publication Society, 1886), p. 435.

          3 Archibald Robertson and Alfred Plummer, A Critical and Exegetical

Commentary on the First Epistle of  St. Paul to the Corinthians, volume 32

of The International Critical Commentary on the Holy Scriptures of the

Old and New Testaments, edited by Samuel Rolles Driver, Alfred Plummer

and Charles Augustus Briggs (Edinburgh: T. & T. Clark, 1914), p. 318.

 


                                                                                                              140

closer when he writes

      The present subjunctive profhteu<wsin, like lalw?si in v. 23,

      pictures the action in progress: "suppose all are engaged in

      propheysing." . . . . The aorist ei]se<lqh, like ei]se<lqwsi in

      v. 34, merely marks the fact of the entrance.1

          2 Timothy 2:5 combines the present and aorist subjunctive forms

of the same verb in the same protasis: e]a<n de> kai> a]qlh? tij, ou]

stefanou?tai e]a>n mh> nomi<mwj a]lqh<sh ("And if anyone competes as an

athlete, he is not crowned unless he competes lawfully."). Robertson

and Lenski offer different interpretations of this passage. First

Robertson:

          Note the sharp distinction between athlei (present subjunctive,

      engage in a contest in general) and athlesei (first aorist active

      subjunctive, engage in a particular contest). Not "except he have

      contended," but simply "unless he contend" . . . . 2

Lenski sees the emphasis this way:

     . . . but we cannot agree with [Robertson] when he has the latter

     mean "engage in a particular contest." Both verbs refer to a

     particular contest. The present subjunctive = "if one engages in an

     athletic event;" this does not assure him the wreath or garland

     "unless (now effective aorist subjunctive) he lawfully (as the law

     of that event prescribes) completes the event.3

          Neither one is clear in their statement, and both miss the point

of the undefined aorist. The present tense sets the context and the

aorist follows naturally within that setting. There is no need to use

a second present; the naturally employed aorist fits perfectly. No

 

          1 R. C. H. Lenski, The Interpretation I and II Corinthians

(Minneapolis: Augsburg Publishing House, 1963), p. 603.

          2 Robertson, World Pictures, IV, p. 617.

          3 R. C. H. Lenski, The Interpretation of St. Paul’s Epistles to

the Colossians, to the Thessalonians, to Timothy, to Titus and to Philemon

(Minneapolis: Augsburg Publishing House, 1961), p. 781.

 


                                                                                                              141

special significance is attached to the aorist.

 

                                       The Apodosis

General Observations

          The apodosis of the probable condition is, according to Burton,

formed by "the Future Indicative or by some other form referring to future

time."1  One would expect, then, that the most common form of the apodosis

would involve future indicative verbs. Such, however, is not the case.

The examples listed in Appendix III indicate that the present indicative

is preferred to the future indicative one hundred eleven to ninty-nine.

Thus the present, rather than the future, is the dominant tense, but

not by much. Is Burton then in error? No, he is not, as the following

considerations show.

 

The Time of the Apodosis

          First, there is no Question that the probable condition is,

in fact, restricted to the future time.2  It presents a conclusion that

is conditioned on a hypothetical situation which is "up in the air" as

the speaker presents it. Were it referring to an objective reality or

an impossibility, as assumed by the speaker, then it would refer to a

real time event: past, present or future, and employ the indicative mood.

 

The Tenses of the Apodosis

          Actually all tenses, present, aorist, future and perfect, are

represented in the apodosis of these conditions. The major tenses,

 

          1 Burton, Moods and Tenses, p. 104.

          2 Robertson, Grammar, p. 1018.

 


                                                                                                              142

though, are the present and future. Statistically, the tables show

133 present tenses, 53 aorists, 99 futures and 5 perfects. These

verbs represent all moods: indicative, subjunctive and imperative. In

terms of indicative verbs there are 111 present indicatives, 8 aorist

indicatives, 99 future indicatives and 5 perfect indicatives. Obviously

there is no general principle for choosing the apodosis verb except

the action being described.

          Do these facts create a problem in terms of the future time

of the condition? Not at all, when one remembers that the primary

function of tense is to describe the aspect of the action, not the

time. One may present the contingent act as one that is simply stated

without any defined aspect (aorist), a progressive act (present and

sometimes future) or, rarely, an act in a state of completion (perfect).

The same observations may be offered regarding the mood of the verbs.

The contingent act may be presented by the speaker as one that will be

actualized upon realization of the stated condition (indicative), one

that may be realized (subjunctive) or one that must be realized

(imperative). Each of these moods makes its unique contribution to

the sense of the whole conditional statement.

 

Tenses Employed in the Apodosis

          Several examples of tense and mood combinations found in the

apodoses of these conditions will be examined to show how they communi-

cate the actions involved.

 


                                                                                                              143

The Present Indicative

          Although the future indicative seems like the obvious choice

for these apodoses, it is second to the present indicative. In light

of this fact it is interesting that Winer should write:

      Hence the consequent clause usually, contains a Fut. . . . or,

      what is equivalent, an Aor, with ou] mh< . . . or an Imperat. . . ,

      more rarely a Pres., and then either in the sense of a Fut. . .

      or denoting something permanent . . . or a general truth . . . .1

          The wide use of the present, however, is not surprising, for

it is frequently used with a future implication. This "futuristic

present" is discussed by Robertson who correctly notes that time is

not the key issue: "Since the pres. ind. occurs for past, present and

future time it is clear that 'time' is secondary even in the ind."2

This use of the present tense projects a progressive or durative

aspect into the future. "As examples of the durative present in this

[futuristic] sense take paradi<dotai (Mt. 26:45), a]nabai<nomen (Mk 10:33),

u[pa<gw a]lieu<ein and e]rxo<meqa (Jo. 21:3), die<rxomai (I Cor. 16:5), e@xomen

(2 Cor. 5:1)."3  Dana and Mantey read more into this use of the present

tense then is justified when they identify it as one that "denotes an

event which has not yet occurred, but which is regarded as so certain

that in thought it may be contemplated as already coming to pass."4

 

          1 Winer, Grammar, p. 293.

          2 Robertson, Grammar, pp. 881-882.

          3 Ibid., p. 882.

          4 Dana and Mantey, Grammar, p. 185.

 


                                                                                                              144

          The futuristic present, properly understood, gives the probable

condition a progressive aspect when used in the apodosis. Sometimes

this is spoken of as a point of emphasis upon the speaker's present

confidence, but such statements do not reflect the proper function of

the present tense. Robertson follows this erroneous concept:

     But ofttimes the conclusion [of the Probable condition] is stated in

     terms of the present either as a present hope or a vivid projection

     into the future (futuristic present). So in 2 Cor. 5:1, e]a<n kataluqh?,

     e@xomen. The condition is future in conception, but the conclusion

     is a present reality, so confident is Paul of the bliss of heaven.1

          Additionally, general rules or maxims often use the present

indicative in the apodosis. Robertson quotes Mark 3:27 (ou] du<natai

ou]dei>j . . . e]a<n mh> prw?ton dh<sh) as an example.2  This fits the continual

aspect of the present tense.

          Burton identifies the use of the present indicative in the

apodosis as the mark of the Present General Supposition.3  He makes this

a separate class of conditions, but previous discussion has shown that

any condition may be particular or general as the situation demands.

Two examples may be offered. Mark 3:27 has already been identified as

a passage Burton identifies as a present general supposition. It is a

statement of a general truth and does employ the present tense.

          But in contrast, consider Matthew 21:26 – e]a>n de> ei@pwmen. e]c

a]nqrw<pwn, fobou<meqa to>n o@xlon ("but if we say, 'of men,' we fear the

 

          1 Robertson, Grammar, p. 1019.

          2 Ibid., p. 1019.

          3 Burton, Moods and Tenses, p. 107.

 


                                                                                                    145

 

the crowd"). The context marks this conclusion as a definite conclusion,

limited to a historical situation. Other examples could be offered to

illustrate the same point. The suggestion of a special catagory of

probable conditions termed "present general conditions" as a grammatical

point should be rejected. It is valid, though, as a contextual

consideration.

 

The Aorist Indicative

          The above discussion on the relationship of time and moods

explains the appearance of the aorist subjunctive verbs in these condi-

tions, but what of the aorist indicative? What sense does this type of

verb give the conclusion of a probable condition?

          Robertson offers two explanations. First, he notes that the

aorist may be considered timeless in all the moods, including the

indicative. "The aor. ind. is sometimes timeless as is always true of

the other modes . . . That may be the explanation here."1  His

second explanation is to accept the normal meaning of the aorist indica-

tive and see a dramatic rhetorical shift in the sense of the condition:

     It is possible also to explain it as a change of standpoint. The

     protasis looks to the future, while the apodosis turns back to the

     past. Such vivid changes in language are due to the swift

     revolution in thought. See Mt. 18:15 . . . .2

          The text of Matthew 18:15 is e]a<n sou a]kou<sh, e]ke<rdhsaj to>n

a]delfo<n sou ("if he listens to you, you have gained your brother").

 

          1 Robertson, Grammar, p. 1020.

          2 Ibid., p. 1020.

 


                                                                                                              146

The aorist indicative may, according to Robertson, be considering the

desired act so intently as to see it completed at some future time in

the mind of the speaker. Elsewhere, though, he backs off from this

position and identifies it as "a sort of timeless aorist, a blessed

achievement already made."1  Hendriksen's translation "you have (meaning

will have) won your brother" reflects this emphasis.2  Lenski stumbles

over technical terms, trying to place the aorist in the future, but

after another future act:

          Here we have a case in which the condition looks to the future

     while the conclusion turns to the past, which R[obertson] 1020

     attributes to the swift leap of thought. But this past is a past

     only to that future: "thou didst gain" if thy brother "shall hear."

     Moreover, the Greek uses the aorist to express this past, whereas

     the English would prefer the perfect "hast gained"; yet we do not

     regard this as a gnomic aorist (R[obertson] 842).3

          It seems best to the author to take the aorist indicative in the

normal sense of undefined aspect rather than time, as Lenski does. It

wraps up the result of the hypothetical a]kou?sh in a real, albeit undefined

act.

 

The Future Indicative

          The subjunctive mood of the protasis places the probable

condition into future time, and one would expect the apodosis to follow.

This is exactly what happens, regardless of the tense employed in the

apodosis. The second most common verb form is the future indicative.

 

          1 Robertson, Word Pictures, I, p. 148.

          2 William Hendriksen, The Gospel of Matthew (Grand Rapids: Baker

Book House, 1973), p. 699.

          3 Lenski, Matthew, p. 700.

 


                                                                                                    147

Like the other tenses, the future states the apodosis as a future act,

contingent upon the protasis. No special significance should be read

into this combination other than an emphasis upon the future time which

is already present in the condition.

 

The Perfect Indicative

          Verbs in the perfect tense describe an action in the state of

completion. They combine the sense of punctiliar (it is completed) with

that of continual (it remains completed).1 These verbs are used in the

apodosis of the probable condition to emphasize the state of completion,

that is, the continual aspect. Winer terms the perfects "equivalent to

Presents,"2 and Robertson agrees, especially in the precept or maxim form

of the condition, as in Romans 14:23 – o[ diakrino<menoj e]a>n fa<gh

katake<kritai ("the one who doubts is condemned if he eats").3  The four  

examples of the perfect tense apodosis fit these observations.

 

Verbs in the Imperative Mood

          The imperative mood appears forty times in the probable condition

apodoses: ninteen present imperatives and twenty-one aorist imperatives.

The imperative mood, of course, places an action in the future. This

fits the sense of the condition as a whole, for the protasis has already

placed the entire thought in the future through the subjunctive mood.

 

          1 Robertson, Shorter Grammar, p. 302.

          2 Winer, Grammar, p. 293.

          3 Robertson, Grammar, p. 1019.

 


                                                                                                              148

Imperative verbs are a natural occurrence in these conditions

 

                        Meaning of the Probable Condition

          The study has proceeded to the point where the meaning of the

probable condition may be discussed. There has been much dissension

among the grammarians on this subject, so the procedure will be to

review the opinions of various scholars, evaluate their position, and

explore the meaning of this condition as contrasted with that of the

simple condition.

 

                              Review of the Grammarians

          This review will follow the pattern of the second chapter:

first the Classical scholars and then the Koine scholars.

 

W. W. Goodwin

          Writing from the Classical viewpoint, W. W. Goodwin describes

these conditions as the "Future suppositions in more vivid form" which

he explains so:

          When a supposed future case is stated distinctly and vividly

      (as in English, if I shall go, or if I go), the protasis has the

      Subjunctive with e]a<n (epic ei ke<), and the apodosis has the future

      indicative or some other form of future time.l

By adding the English "shall" or "will" Goodwin hopes to add more

emphasis to the condition. Whether it comes across in the English

translation or not, the Greek, in his opinion, places emphasis upon

the intensity of the statement.

 

          1 W. W. Goodwin, Greek Grammar, revised by Charles Burton Gulick

(Boston:  Ginn and Company, 1930), p. 300.

 


                                                                                                              149

          The speaker, according to Goodwin, makes no implication about the

degree of probability assigned to the condition. The speaker's emphasis

is upon the vividness or intensity of the statement. As will be seen

later, Goodwin terms conditions which employ the optative mood "less

vivid conditions."

          The basis for his view lies in the futuristic use of the subjunc-

tive mood:

          In the Homeric language the subjunctive (generally the aorist)

     may be used in independent sentences, with the force of a future

     indicative. The negative is ou] . . . .

          This Homeric subjunctive, like the future indicative, is some-

     times joined with ke< or a@n in a potential sense. This enabled the

     earlier language to express an apodosis with a sense between that

     of the optative with a@n and that of the simple future indicative,

     which the Attic was unable to do.1

The subjunctive mood, then, would be making a simple statement about the

future in a way that would be less emphatic (or vivid) than the future

indicative, but more so than the optative.

 

G. B. Winer

          Winer, a Koine grammarian, simply states the case of this type

of condition as one of probability without any other alternative being

considered:

          Condition with assumption of objective possibility (where

      experience will decide whether or not it is real):  if thy friend

      should come (I do not know whether he will come, but the result will

      show). Here e]a<n . . . with the Subjunctive is used.2

Later he writes that this condition is used "if an objective

 

          1 W. W. Goodwin, Syntax Moods and Tenses (Boston: Ginn and

Company, 1893), p. 97.

          2 Winer, Grammar, p. 291.

 


                                                                                                              150

possibility with the expectation of a decision is to be expressed."1 The

sense of the probable condition as Winer sees it, then, is one of a

degree of expected (or implied) fulfillment, rather than one of vividness

of statement.

 

E. Burton

          Normally Burton follows Goodwin in his treatment of conditional

sentences, but here he departs from Goodwin's scheme by identifying the

probable condition as the "Future Supposition with More Probability."

His explanation is:

     The protasis states a supposition which refers to the future,

      suggesting some probability of its fulfillment.

          The protasis is usually expressed by e]a<n (or a@n) with the

     Subjunctive; the apodosis by the Future Indicative or by some other

     form referring to future time.2

          Burton's terminology is more accurate than Winer's, and his

understanding of the sense of this condition is the same. The words

"more probability," if understood from the speaker's point of view,

better describe the probable condition than "objective probability."

         

Blass-Debrunner

          Blass-Debrunner also supports the concept of anticipated fulfill-

ment as the basic significance of this condition:

          (4)  ]Ea<n with the subjunctive denotes that which under certain

     circumstances is expected from an existing general or concrete

     standpoint in the present: 'case of expectation' and 'iterative

     case in present time.'3

 

          1  Winer, Grammar, p. 293.

          2 Burton, Syntax of Moods and Tenses, p. 104.

          3 Blass-DeBrunner, Grammar, p. 188.

 


                                                                                                              151

Here again the basic concept is anticipation or expectation of fulfill-

ment, not vividness of statement.

 

A. T. Robertson

          In his Shorter Grammar Robertson identifies this condition in

this manner:

      This condition states the condition as a matter of doubt, but with

      some expectation of realization. Hence the subjunctive is the mode

     of doubt used, not the optative, the mode of still greater doubt.

     It is undetermined and so does not use the indicative mode, but

     there is more hope and that marks it off from the optative.l

Concerning the subjunctive mood in particular he writes:

     The chief difference between the subjunctive and the optative can

      be conveyed by our words probablity [subjunctive] and possibility

      [optative]. Both are modes of doubtful assertion, but the optative

       is more doubtful.2

          His term "doubtful" communicates a concept of negative

thought that the terms "probable" or "possible" do not. They are to

be preferred. His overall concept of the sense of the condition is

correct.

 

                           Evaluation of the Grammarians

Vividness versus Probability

          The first question involves the basic emphasis of this condition.

Does it stress the vividness of the condition as seen by the speaker, or

does it speak of an idea of anticipated fulfillment? The underlying

concept, of course, is one's view of the force of the subjunctive mood.

 

          1 Robertson, Shorter Grammar, p. 353.

          2 Ibid., p. 309.


                                                                                                              152

Goodwin lays stress upon the vividness of the statement, locating the

subjunctive between the indicative and the optative. This evaluation

comes from his analysis of Classical Greek syntax.

          Koine grammarians, in general, support the concept that the

subjunctive reflects probability or anticipation rather than vividness.

This, for example, is how Robertson speaks of the basic meaning of this

mood. Thus his terminology "undetermined, but with prospect of

determination" is applied to this condition.1  Others have followed

him: Dana and Mantey--"More Probable Future Condition,"2 Roberts

(following Gildersleeve)--"Anticipatory Condition,"3 and Burton--

"Future Supposition with More Probability."4  La Sor represents a unique

position among Koine grammarians with his acceptance of Goodwin's concept

of vividness as the basic meaning of this condition. Though he seems to

equate probability with vividness in his discussion, he prefers the

former terminology in classification:

          Future conditions can only be probable. But the degree of

     probability in the speaker's mind is variable. There is a more 

     probable (or "more vivid") future condition ("If you [will] take

     me, I shall go"), and a less probable (or "less vivid") future

     condition ("If you would take me, I would go"). Because the degree

     of probability exists only in the speaker's mind, many grammarians

     prefer the terms "more vivid" and "less vivid," and avoid

     reference to probability.5

 

          1 Robertson, Grammar, p. 1016.

          2 Dana and Mantey, Grammar, p. 290.

          3 Roberts, "Conditional Sentences," p. 24.

          4 Burton, Moods and Tenses, p. 104.

          5 William Sanford La Sor, Handbook of New Testament Greek, 2 vols.

(Grand Rapids: Wm. B. Eerdmans Publishing Company, 1973), II, p. 222.


                                                                                                    153

          Of course, the degree of vividness is also a product of the

speaker's mind, hence the argument could be reversed, for the condition

can and usually does have contact with external facts. More to the

point, though, is the fact that La Sor seems to miss the significance

of the two terms. "Vividness" does not avoid a logical or semantic

difficulty, for it is not interchangeable with the concept of

probability. As commonly used, the term refers to the drama, the

intensity behind a statement. "Probability," on the other hand, has

reference to a more hopeful, anticipatory concept. It brings fulfillment

closer in terms of objective reality, not dramatic impact. Among Koine

grammarians La Sor's "many grammarians" are limited to a class of one:

himself. It seems best to this author to keep it that way.

 

New Testament Examples

          The deciding factor, though, is the text of the New Testament.

What does it indicate? Three examples will be evaluated: Matthew 18:15,

Luke 4:7 and I Thessalonians 3:8.

 

Matthew 18:15

          The text reads e]a<n sou a]kou<sh, e]ke<rdhsaj to>n a]delfo<n sou ("if he

hears you, you have gained your brother"). Is this presenting a situation

in a "more vivid" manner, or is there a degree of expectation or antici-

pation in the statement? Although the question is beyond the grammar of

the sentence, the context and direct implication seem clear: there is a

real hope, a definite prospect of gaining the sinning brother. The

speaker does not give the condition a sense of sureness, for he uses the

subjunctive mood. But he expresses optimistic probability of restoring


                                                                                                              154

fellowship with the sinning brother. Willoughby Allen so interprets the

passage,1 as do Broadus,2 and Lenski.3  Again, the point in question is

the force of the condition. It is emphasising, not the dramatic aspect

of the situation, but the hopeful anticipation of realizing the condition.

Thus the term "probable condition" better describes the condition.

Luke 4:7

          The text reads su> ou#n e]a>n proskunh<shj e]nw<pion e]mou?, e@stai sou?

pa?sa ("therefore, if you will worship before me, all this will be yours").

Is the Devil making a vivid statement, or is he speaking so as to

anticipate the probability of Jesus' positive response? In the context

of the temptation one would choose the latter alternative. As both

Nicoll4 and Hendriksen5 note, the emphasis is upon the anticipated

fulfillment of the condition rather than the vividness of it. This,

too, is a probable condition.

 

I Thessalonians 3:8

          Paul writes o!ti nu?n zw?men e]a>n u[mei?j sth<kete e]n kuri<& ("now we

live if you stand fast in the Lord"). The historical context of this

 

          1 Willoughby Allen, A Critical and Exegetical Commentary on the

Gospel According to S. Matthew, vol. 26 of The International Critical

Commentary, edited by Samuel Rolles Driver, Alfred Plummer and Charles

Augustus Briggs (Edinburgh: T. 6 T. Clark, 1907), p. 197.

          2 Broadus, Matthew, p. 387.

          3 Lenski, Matthew, pp. 699-700.

          4 Nicoll, Testament, I, p. 486.

          5 William Hendriksen, The Good of Luke (Grand Rapids: Baker

Book House, 1978), pp. 236-237.


                                                                                                              155

passage argues for the concept of anticipated, probable fulfillment.

Paul had received confirmation that the Thessalonian believers were

standing firm in Christ, and he drew significant encouragement from

their faithfulness. His statement anticipates continued standing on

their part. The present indicative in the apodosis reenforces this idea,

considering his future encouragement in a dramatic form. Commentators

favoring this view include Ellicott1 and Hendriksen.2

          While some examples may be understood as vivid, dramatic

statements, it is clear that some, if not the greater portion, imply a

probable degree of fulfillment. Robertson's concept of the subjunctive

mood as one of expectation or anticipation describes the text of the

New Testament better than Goodwin's concept of vividness.

          Since the basic sense of this condition is future, and the mood

employed presents an anticipated or probable fulfillment, this author

has selected the title "probable condition." Probable in this sense is

contrasted with possible, as will be seen when the optative mood is

discussed. "Probable" also communicates some degree or amount of

expectation, which this condition contains. All in all, this term is the

best one for a one-word description of the significance of this type of

condition.

 

          1 Charles J. Ellicott, Commentary on the Epistles to the Thessa-

lonians (Grand Rapids: Zondervan Publishing House, 1957 reprint of 1861

edition), pp. 42-43.

          2 William Hendriksen, I and II Thessalonians (Grand Rapids: Baker

Book House, 1964), p. 88.


                                                                                                              156

                     Relationship with the Simple Condition

          A final step in the discussion of the probable condition is

to evaluate its relationship with the simple condition.

 

Opinions of the Grammarians

          Goodwin and those following him, it will be remembered,

classify conditional sentences with respect to the time involved in

them: "The most obvious natural distinction is that of (a) present and

past conditions and (b) future conditions."1  Gildersleeve, Robertson

and others classify them in terms of their relationship to reality:

those presented by the speaker as real, and those presented as potential.

Each of these two groups may be divided into two. The first divides

into those presented as actual and those presented as impossible. The

second group divides into those stated as more likely to be fulfilled

and those presented as less likely. The suggested terms for these two

concepts are "probable" and "possible."

 

Observations of the New Testament

          Enough has been said to suggest that this distinction is main-

tained in the New Testament. But does the text itself support such a

conclusion? The answer is Yes, and a brief consideration of several

passages which use both conditions will support this conclusion.

 

          John 13:17.--Both a simple and a probable condition are used

in conjunction with a single apodosis in John 13:17—ei] tau?ta oi@date

maka<rioi< e]ste e]a>n poih?te au]ta< ("if you know these things, you will be

 

          1 Goodwin, Moods and Tenses, p. 139.


                                                                                                              157

blessed if you do them"). The simple condition states the matter with

an assumption of reality, hence Jesus is saying, "If you know these

things, and I am assuming that you do . . . ." The last member of the

verse is the protasis of a probable condition. The two protases are

both connected to the one apodosis makarioi este.

          What, then, can be made of this situation? Godet's terminology

is ambiguous: "Ei], if, 'if truly.' as is really the case; it is the

general supposition; e]a<n, in case that; it is the more particular

condition."1  He seems to be using the term "particular" in the sense

of anticipation or probability, as his interpretation indicates. But

the specific term is misleading at best.

          Nicoll recognizes the difference: "ei] oi@date, 'if ye know,' as

you do know; e]a<n poih?te, a supposition." "The knowing is objectively

granted, the doing subjectively conditioned."2  This, of course, is the

same as Godet. Lenski argues at length for this distinction:

      The first is a condition of reality: "If you know these things,"

      for Jesus rightly assumes that they do know them . . . .

          But, of course, only "if you keep doing them." Doing is

      emphatic over against mere knowing. The condition is now one of

      expectancy, "if you shall be doing them." Jesus expects it of them,

      yet it is possible that they may disappoint him--will they? the

      condition asks.3

          Robertson continues this line of reasoning: "Here we have the

first and third class conditions happily combined with a clear distinc-

 

          1 Godet, John, II, p. 252.

          2 Nicoll, Testament, I, pp. 187-188.

          3 R. C. H. Lenski, The Interpretation of St. John's Gospel

(Minneapolis: Augsburg Publishing House, 1961), p. 929.


                                                                                                              158

tion. Jesus assumes the knowledge as a fact, but the performance is-

doubtful."1  Roberts accepts this reasoning,2 but Battle comes at it

another way. Setting aside Robertson's comment on "doubtful," he

explains the verse so: "Jesus regards their present knowledge as either

existing or not--that matter is settled. But he regards their perfor-

mance as possible or probable in the future."3  Actually, both Battle

and Robertson are saying the same thing. The term "doubtful" is used by

Robertson as a contrast to the factuality assumed in the first statement.

"Doubtful" does mean "possible or probable."

          The comparison of the two conditions illustrates the way

each of them presents its concept. The simple condition assumes that

the disciples know the facts under discussion. The probable condition

anticipates their performance, their application of these facts. But

the speaker does not assume that such actions will happen.

         

          Acts 5:38-39.--Another interesting combination of conditions is

found in Acts 5:38-39—o!ti e]a>n h# e]c a]nqrw<pwn, h[ boulh< au!th h} to> e@rgon

tou?to, kataluqh<setai: ei] de> e]k qeou? e]stin, ou] dunh<sesqe katalu?sai

au]tou<j ("for if this purpose or work is of men, it will be destroyed;

but if it is of God, you will not be able to destroy these men").

Is Gamaliel stating the first condition as a vivid future condition and

 

          1 Robertson, Grammar, p. 1019, also Word Pictures, V, p. 241.

          2 Roberts, "Conditional Sentences," p. 226.

          3 Battle, "Present Indicative," p. 170.


                                                                                                              159

the second as a simple condition, or is he communicating certain assump-

tions about the infant Church?

          The fact that Gamaliel, a leader of the Pharisees, offers this

advice and employes a simple condition in so doing has caused some

commentators to view him a sympathetic toward Christianity. Alexander

even refers to an "old opinion" that Gamaliel was a secret believer on

this basis, but he himself does not hold to that view) Nicoll puts

the case cautiously:

     . . . it has sometimes been thought that the change of mood from

     subjunctive to indicative, "but if it is of God," as if indicating

     that the second supposition were the more probable (c4. Gal. i. 8, 9),

     indicates sympathy on the part of Gamaliel.2

          Robertson identifies Gamaliel's motive for changing conditions

in the politics of the situation:

     Gamaliel gives the benefit of the doubt to Christianity. He assumes

     that Christianity is of God and puts the alternative that it is of

     men in the third class. This does not, of course, show that

     Gamaliel was a Christian or an inquirer. He was merely willing to

     score a point against the Sadducees.3

Battle follows this reasoning in general, though he stresses the "aspect"

emphasis of the conditions in terms of their relationship to reality:

     It seems better, rather, to view Gamaliel's speech from the stand-

     point of aspect. Whether the new sect and its miraculous power were

     from God, is a settled fact which nothing can change. If, on the

     other hand, it is of men, then future events will show it to be so--

     an alternative Gamaliel could have considered probable, even though

     he used ei] with the indicative.4

 

          1 J. A. Alexander, Commentary on the Acts of the Apostles (Grand

Rapids: Zondervan Publishing House, 1956 reprint of 1875 edition),

pp. 237-238.

          2 Nicoll, Testament, II, p. 161.

          3 Robertson, Grammar, p. 1018.

          4 Battle, "Present Indicative," p. 171,


                                                                                                              160

          Battle's emphasis on aspect points to the significance of the

two conditional clauses. The first one, the probable condition, sets the

tone of the entire statement. The whole statement is put into future

time. The first condition is a probable condition; Gamaliel stated the

case so as to imply an anticipated, probable fulfillment. It will

probably prove to be of men. The second condition, a simple one,

considers the connection between Christianity and God. The time is

still future, and the indicative mood presents the situation in an

aspect of reality. All things are known to God, and He certainly knows

the truth about this new sect. Gamaliel does shift to the indicative

mood in his second condition, not so much to give Christianity the

benefit of the doubt, but to acknowledge that God certainly knows the

true situation. The simple condition provides the means to express this

assumption.

          I Corinthians 10:27-28.--The general topic of Christian conduct

in the Corinthian culture led Paul to discuss the proper response of a

believer if he was invited to an unbeliever's home and then confronted

with a difficult situation. These two hypothetical cases are discussed

in two conditional sentences, the first a simple condition, the second

a probable condition-- (verse 27) ei@ tij kalei ? u[ma?j tw?n a]pi<stwn kai>

qe<lete poreu<esqai, pa?n to> paratiqe<menon u[mi?n e]sqi<ete . . . . (verse 28)

e]a<n de< tij u[mi?n ei@ph: tou?to i[ero<qcto<n e]stin, mh> e]sti<ete. Again the two

conditions are set side by side, and again an opportunity is given to

evaluate the relative meanings of the two. The difference is more than

just time. The first, the simple condition, presents the invitation as

 

 


                                                                                                              161

an assumed reality. Paul states the case, at least for the sake of

argument, that believers will be invited over to unbeliever's homes

for dinner. But in this social setting a second situation might arise.

The believer might be confronted with the fact that his dinner had been

offered to an idol. This situation, Paul assumes, would be less likely

to confront a Christian than the invitation. Not every host will raise

the idol question.

          The conditions employed reflect these two assumptions. The

first, the simple condition, has already been discussed. The second,

the probable condition, presents its condition, as Ellicott says, as

"a case of distinctly objective possibility."1  Nicoll refers to it

as "a probable contingency," as contrasted with the first, "an assumed

fact."2  Lenski describes the first as "a condition that expresses

reality," and the second as "a condition that expresses expectancy."3

Robertson and Plummer explain the two conditions as: "'If any one invites

you,' a thing which is very possible and may have happened. 'If any

one should say to you,' a pure hypothesis and not so very probable."4

 

          1 Charles J. Ellicott, A Critical and Grammatical Commentary on

St. Paul’s First Epistle to the Corinthians (Andover: W. F. Draper,

Publisher, 1889), p. 203.

          2 Nicoll, Testament, II, p. 868.

          3 Lenski, I and II Corinthians, p. 421.

          4 Archibald Robertson and Alfred Plummer, A Critical and Exegetical

Commentary on the First Epistle of St. Paul to the Corinthians, vol. 32 of

The International Critical Commentary on the Holy Scriptures of the Old

and New Testaments, edited by Samuel Rolles Driver, Alfred Plummer and

Charles Augustus Briggs (Edinburgh: T. & T. Clark, 1914), p. 221.


                                                                                                              162

          The context itself points to the fact that the reception of a

dinner invitation would be a normal course of social affairs, offering

insight into the expected relationship between an individual Christian

and his neighbors. The confrontation with the dinner's past history

would not be as probable, but certainly not outside the realm of normal

experience. Thus the two conditions: the first assumes the invitation

to be real, the second presents the confrontation as a definite possibility.

          Galatians 1:8-9.--His warnings against false teachers and

gospels bring Paul to speak against such in the strongest of terms in

Galatians 1:8-9, again employing the simple and the probable conditions:

(verse 8) a]lla> kai> e]a>n h[mei?j h} a@ggeloj e]c ou]ranou ? eu]aggeli<shtai . . .

a]na<qema e@stw. (verse 9) w[j proeioh<kamen kai> a@rti pa<lin le<gw, ei@ tij

u[ma?j eu]aggeli<zetai par ] o! paqela<bete, a]na<qema e@stw. Here the sequence

of conditions is opposite to that of I Corinthians 10:27-28. Paul begins

with the subjunctive and moves to the indicative. Buttmann identifies

this as an example where

     The difference between [them] is plainly to be recognized in

     sentences where both are used in close proximity; as Gal. i. 8,9,

     where the hypothesis expressed in the 8th verse by e]a<n with the

     Subjunctive is resumed or repeated in the 9th with greater energy

      and definiteness by ei] with the Indicative. So in Acts v. 38-39.1

          Burton agrees, expanding upon the thought:

      This sentence [verse 9] differs from that of v. 8 in two respects

      which affect the thought: (1) the element of concession and impro-

      bability disappears in the omission of h[mei?j h} a@ggeloj e]c ou]qanou?;

    

          l Alexander Buttmann, A Grammar of the New Testament Greek,

translated and edited by J. H. Thayer (Andover: Warren F. Draper,

Publisher, 1873), p. 220.


                                                                                                    163

     (2) the form of the condition that suggests future possibility is

     displaced by that which expresses simple present supposition, and

     which is often used when the condition is known to be actually

     fulfilled. The result is to bring the supposition closer home to

     the actual case, and since it was known both to Paul and his readers

     that the condition ei@ tij . . . parela<bete was at that very time in

     process of fulfillment, to apply the a]na<qema e@stw directly to those

     who were then preaching in Galatia.1

          The shift from the probable condition to the simple condition

serves to place emphasis upon Paul's assumption that there were those

at that present time who were preaching a false gospel in Galatia. The

emphasis moves from the probable condition with its lack of assumption

as to the reality of the case to the simple condition which states such

an assumption.

          Lenski uses inconsistent terminology when he writes: "Note the

difference in the conditional clauses: kai> e]a<n vividly supposes a case;

ei] in v. 9 takes up the real case that is now occurring in Galatia."2

Is the first condition being stated vividly or being stated as a

possibility? Robertson argues for possibility, even including Paul

himself.3 The better term would be "probability."

 

Summary

          Battle identifies Kinge's statement as "the clearest exposition

of conditional present exegesis which this author has found:"4

 

          1 Ernest DeWitt Burton, A Critical and Exegetical Commentary on

the Epistle to the Galatians, vol. 35 of The International

Commentary, edited by Samuel Rolfes Driver, Alfred Plummer and Charles

Augustus Briggs (Edinburgh: T. & T. Clark, 1921), p. 30.

          2 Lenski, Galatians, p. 38.

          3 Robertson, Word Pictures, IV, p. 277

          4 Battle, "Present Tense," p. 170.


                                                                                                    164

      When ei]. with the indicative is used, it implies that the truth or

      otherwise of the condition is regarded as in principle "determined,"

      i.e. is represented as a fact (although the speaker does not commit

      himself as to whether he believes the condition is true or not).

          When can with the subjunctive is used, it implies that the truth

     or otherwise of the condition is regarded as in principle "undeter-

     mined," i.e. is represented as uncertain, either because the condition

     is conceived as a future occurrence, which may or may not ever take

     place, or because the condition is a general one which may be

     realized at any time.1

This author agrees with Battle that Kinje provides a succinct summary

of the distinction between simple and probable conditions.

          A test case may be made of Acts 5:38-39. The first condition,

e]a>n h# e]c a]nqrw<pwn h[ boulh> au!ta h} to> e@rgon tou?to, kataluqh<setai,

regards the source of the Christian sect as "in principle" undetermined and open

to future evaluation. This could be paraphrased: "If this counsel or this

work is of men (as the future may well demonstrate) . . . ." The

second condition, ei] de> e]k qeou? e]stin, ou] dunh<sesqe katalu?sai au]touj,

represents the situation "as a fact," one that is presently, in theory

at least, determined. This may be paraphrased as "but if it is of God

(as may be assumed in light of the facts) . . . ."  The distinctions

fit the case well, and do not put Gamaliel on either side of the debate,

for neither condition of necessity conveys the speaker's true convictions.

          By examining these examples it may be seen that a distinction is

to be drawn between the simple condition and the probable condition in

terms of probability or anticipation rather than vividness. The former

states the condition as an assumed reality, while the latter presents it

as a potential future reality. This is the basic meaning of this

condition.

 

          1 John Kinje, Jr., "Greek Conditional Sentences," The Bible

Translator, 13:4 (October, 1962), p. 223.


                                                                                                    165

                          Translation of the Probable Condition

          Are there any general principles which can be derived from this

study to guide translators in their handling of the probable condition?

In order to answer this question consideration will be given to the opinion

of the grammars, then some observations will be made from the New Testa-

ment.

 

                                The Grammarians' Opinions

          A few grammarians have ventured opinions on the translation of

at least some types of probable conditions. Chief among them is Moulton

who writes:

      The verbs are all futuristic, and the a@n ties them up to particular

      occurrences. The present accordingly is conative or continuous or

      iterative: Mt 62 o!tan poih?j e]lehmosu<nhn "whenever thou art for doing

      alms," 616  o!tan nhseu<hte  "Whenever ye are fasting, " Jo 25   o!ti a@n le<gh

     "whatever he says (from time to time)." The aorist, being future by

      virtue of its mood, punctiliar by its tense, and consequently

      describing complete action, gets a future-perfect sense in this class

      of sentence; and it will be found most important to, note this, before

      we admit the less rigid translation. Thus Mt 521 o!j a}n foneu<sh "the

      man who has committed murder,"  547 e]a<n a]spa<shsqe "if you have only

      saluted him," Mk 918 o!pou e]a<n au]to>n kataqa<bh "wherever it has seized

      him;" the cast of the sentence allows us to abbreviate the future-

      perfect in these cases.1

He obviously misses the point about the aorist. Such verbs are neither

punctiliar because of their tense, nor are they assigned to the future

by their subjunctive mood. Were these true, then his suggested transla-

tion might be reasonable. Moulton does not discuss any exceptions to

this, though he does raise Matthew 5:21 as an apparent problem. He

answers this by noting that a]polu<sh "denotes not so much the carrying

 

          1 Moulton, Prolegomena, p. 186.


                                                                                                              166

into effect as the determination."1

          Thayer agrees with Moulton, noting that e]a<n with the aorist

subjunctive corresponds to the Latin future perfect. He translates

Matthew 4:9.  e]a>n proskunh<shj moi, as "if thou shall have worshipped me.”2

Interestingly enough, none of the versions checked adopted this form

of translation, including the Douay-Rheims, Darby's translation,

Phillip's paraphrase, the New English Bible, The Revised Standard

Version, and the New American Standard Bible.  All of them translate

these verses (Matthew 4:9, 5:21, 5:47 and Mark 9:18) as English future

tenses. This lends support to the objections raised by some against

Moulton's position.

          The objections come from Robertson mainly and are directed

against Moulton's rule of using a future-perfect English verb to

translate the aorist subjunctive in these conditions:

     I doubt the propriety, however, of reading a future perfect sense

     a la Latin into this aorist subj. as Moulton does. He cites Mt. 5:47,

     e]a<n a]spa<shsqe, but surely the simple aorist conception is sufficient.3

Though he does not discuss this particular verse in Word Pictures, he

doubtless would have followed all major versions by using the English

future and considering the act as one simply stated by the aorist and

assigned by context to the future time.

 

          1 Moulton, Prolegomena, p. 186.

          2 Joseph Henry Thayer, Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the

New Testament, reprint of the Corrected Edition (Marshallton, Delaware:

The National Foundation for Christian Education, n.d.), p. 162.

          3 Robertson, Grammar, p. 1019.


                                                                                                              167

          Burton also objects to the establishment of a uniform rule and

offers the best suggestion:

          An Aorist Subjunctive after ean, otan, ewj, etc. is sometimes

      properly translated by a Perfect or Future Perfect., but only

      because the Context shows that the action is to precede that of the

      principal verb. In the great majority of cases a Present Subjunctive

      or a Future is the best translation.1

His emphasis upon context as the deciding factor is the key consideration,

for there are some probable conditions where the context argues against

a future perfect translation. As in all cases, the context is the

deciding factor.

 

                               New Testament Observations

          The examples in which the context does not fit a future perfect

translation include John 14:3, where the emphasis is upon the future

departure of Christ; John 19:2 where the releasing of Jesus was contemp-

lated as a future act; and Romans 15:24 where the filling of Paul by the

Roman believers is best understood as a simple, i.e. undefined, future

act.

          The emphasis of the New Testament is that the context should

decide the specific translation. The English should represent as far as

possible the sense of the specific tenses. The translator, though, has

to remember that the tenses communicate aspect rather than time of

action, hence, any tense, especially in the subjunctive mood, may be

considered a future act. There is no uniform rule that will govern the

specific English verb form selected in each case.

 

          1 Burton, Mood and Tenses, p. 47.


                                                                                                              168

                                         Summary

          The best rule for translation is that of context: each condition

must be handled on its own merits and situation. The English should

reflect two things. First, the aspect of the verb used in the condition.

The undefined aspect of the aorist tense is to be directly translated

into English. The continual aspect of the present usually comes into

English in the form of a participle. The time considerations of the

probable condition are by definition future. Thus the best English

combination will be a verb with its helping verbs to communicate both

ideas.


 

 

 

 

                                        CHAPTER V

                           THE POSSIBLE CONDITION

                                         Introduction

          The final category of conditional sentences is noticable for its

relative absence in Koine Greek literature, especially the New Testament.

In fact, this condition is technically outside the scope of this study,

for no complete sentence of this type exists in the New Testament. This

condition is included here, however, for the sake of completeness, though

it is better thought of as a special use of the optative mood.

Technically this condition "is expressed by ei] with the optative in the

protasis and a@n with the optative in the apodosis.”1

          Moulton recognizes its absence when he writes that "Neither in

LXX nor in NT is there an ex. of ei] c. opt. answered with opt. c. a@n, nor

has one been quoted from the papyri."2  Consequently it is difficult to

establish firm conclusions about its use in the New Testament. A general

survey of the few partial examples will establish the general signifi-

cance of this condition. First, though, a brief review of the optative

mood will be given.

 

          1 H. E. Dana and Julius R. Mantey, A Manual Grammar of the Greek

New Testament (New York: The MacMillan Company, 1966), p. 290.

          2 J. H. Moulton, A Grammar of New Testament Greek. Volume 1:

Prolegomena, third edition (Edinburgh: T. & T. Clark, 1908), p. 196.

                                                169
                                                                                                    170

                             The Optative Mood in General

                                   General Observations

          All grammarians agree that the optative mood has been the least

used of all the Greek moods. Indeed, it has all but disappeared in

Modern Greek, save for the stock phrase mh> ge<noito.1  Robertson observes

that Greek was the only language to preserve both the subjunctive and

optative moods, but that the former was by far the dominant mood in

conversation and writing.2    Moulton states that the "optative mood

was doomed from the very birth of the koinh< . . . ."3 Obviously it

was well on its way to its final demise during the time of the New

Testament.

          The total number of optatives in the New Testament is not very

great. Robertson claims sixty-seven,4 and this is accepted by Heinz.5

Although this is a statistically small quantity, the optative mood does

make a significant contribution to the comprehension of the New Testament.

Since some of that contribution is in the conditional sense, the details

of the optative mood will be explored.

 

          1 A. T. Robertson, A Grammar of the Greek New Testament in the

Light of Historical Research (Nashville: Broadman Press, 1934), p. 325.

          2 Ibid., pp. 325-326.

          3 Moulton, Prolegomena, p. 240.

          4 Robertson, Grammar, p. 939.

          5 Vincent Heinz, "The Optative Mood in the Greek New Testament,"

unpublished Th.M. thesis, Dallas Theological Seminary, 1962, p. 23.


                                                                                                              170

                             Specific Classifications

          Robertson and others identify three basic uses of the optative

mood: Futuristic (or Potential), Volitive and Deliberative.1  These

will be examined below.

 

The Futuristic (or Potential) Optative

          Grammarians who address the subject of the optative mood in

detail agree on the significance of the potential optative. Moulton

expresses it best: "It was used to express a future in milder form, and

to express a request in deferential style."2  Robertson3 and Heinz agree

with this statement. This particular form of the optative may or may not

employ the particle a@n. New Testament examples of this type of optative

may be found in Luke 9:46—to> ti<j a}n ei@h me<zwn au]tw?n ("which of them

might be the greatest") and Acts 17:18—ti< a}n qe<loi o[ spermolo<goj

ou$toj le<gein; ("What might this babbler wish to say?").

          Usually the potential optative occurs with the particle an. This

is its usual form which, as Robertson notes, is limited to Luke's

writings and is "an evident literary touch."5 The combination implies

a conditional concept, making "one think of the unexpressed protasis of

 

          1 A. T. Robertson and W. Hersey Davis, A New Short Grammar of

The Greek Testament (New York: Harper & Brothers, 1933), p. 311.

          2 Moulton, Prolegomena, p. 197.

          3 Robertson, Grammar, p. 937.

          4 Heinz, "Optative Mood," p. 31.

          5 Robertson, Grammar, p. 938.


                                                                                                    171/172

the fourth-class condition."1  Burton is more detailed:

          The Optative with an is used to express what would happen on the

     fulfillment of some supposed condition. It is thus an apodosis

     correlative to a protasis expressed or implied. It is usually

     translated by the English Potential.2

He lists Acts 8:31—pw?j ga>r a}n dunai<mhn e]a>n mh< tij o]dhgh<sei me ("How

can I unless someone should guide me?") and Acts 17:18 (already quoted) as

examples. The specific details of the optative and its conditional use

will be discussed below, but this observation illustrates the close

link between the two.

 

The Volitive Optative

          The most frequent use of the optative is that of an expression

of volition or a wish, hence the term "volitive" and the name "optative."3

Blass--Debrunner notes that "The optative proper used to denote an

attainable wish is still in use in the NT as it is in the the LXX and

Papyri (negative mh<)."4 This is the most frequent use of this mood.

 

          1 Robertson, Grammar, p. 937.

          2 Ernest DeWitt Burton, Syntax of Moods and Tenses in New Testa-

ment Greek (Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1897), pp. 79-80.

          3 Alexander Buttmann, A Grammar of the New Testament Greek, trans-

lated and edited by J. H. Thayer (Andover: Warren F. Draper, Publisher,

1873), p. 214.

          4 Friedrich Blass and Albert Debrunner, A Greek Grammar of the

New Testament and Other Early Christian Literature, translated and revised

by Rovert W. Funk (Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1961), p. 194.


                                                                                                              173

Burton identifies thirty-five such examples in the New Testament,1 which

Moulton corrects to thirty-eight: ". . . which come down to 23 when we

drop mh> ge<noito.  Of these Paul claims 15 . . ., while Mk, Lk, Ac, Heb,

I Pet and 2 Pet have one apiece, and Jude two."2

          Heinz identifies three types of volitive optatives: (a) Optative

of Depreciation, (b) Optative of Wishing and (c) Optative of Command. It

is also his opinion that the volitive optative "is rare in the New

Testament in dependent [including conditional] clauses."3  Robertson,

on the other hand, claims that "The use of the opt. in the protasis of

[the possible] condition is probably volitive . . .”4  This relatively

minor problem will be discussed later.

 

The Deliberative Optative

          The optative mood is used in indirect discourse, and Robertson

terms this usage the "Deliberative Optative."5  Blass-Debrunner use the

term "oblique optative."6  Dana and Mantey describe this use as one in

which "indirect rhetorical questions are expressed by the optative.  In      

this construction an unusually doubtful attitude of mind is implied."7

 

          1 Burton, Moods and Tenses, p. 79.

          2 Moulton, Prolegomena, pp. 194-195.

          3 Heinz, "Optative Mood," pp. 24-28, 42.

          4 Robertson, Grammar, p. 1020.

          5 Ibid., p. 940.

          6 Blass-Debrunner, Grammar, p. 195.

          7 Dana and Mantey, Grammar, p. 174.


                                                                                                              174

There are few examples of this use in the New Testament, not only because

of the scarcity of the optative mood in general, but "simply because of

the very strong overall preference for direct discourse" shown in the

New Testament.1

          Heinz questions Robertson's identification of the deliberative

optative as a separate use. His thesis argues that the volitive and

potential optatives may be used in either dependent or independent

clauses. In this he is supported by Moulton, who also speaks of only two

uses of the optative.2   Further, Heinz identifies a separate category

which is limited to dependent clauses and "which cannot be satisfactorily

categorized as either volitative or potential."3  This use is termed the

oblique optative, in parallel with Blass-Debrunner's terminology.

The ultimate resolution of the deliberative or oblique optative

question has no effect on the subject of conditional sentences, but it

does illustrate the difficulty of precise analysis of relatively few

examples.

 

                    The Optative Mood in Conditional Sentences

          Having given the optative mood a brief overview, its use in

conditional sentences will be considered. The form of these sentences as

well as their significance will be discussed.

 

          1 Blass-Debrunner, Grammar., p. 195.

          2 Moulton, Prolegomena, pp. 194-199.

          3 Heinz, "Optative Mood," p. 54.


                                                                                          175

                                 The Construction

The Format Used

          Burton concisely states the form of the probable condition:

      The protasis states a supposition which refers to the future,

       suggesting less probability of its fulfillment than is suggested by

       e]a<n with the Subjunctive.

          The protasis is expressed by ei] with the Optative; the apodosis

       by the Optative with a@n.1

He then speaks of the absence of this condition in the New Testament:

          There is no perfect example of this form in the New Testament.

      Protases occur in I Cor. and I Pet., but never with a regular and

      fully expressed apodosis. Apodoses occur in Luke and Acts, but

      never with a regular protasis.2

          Moulton accepts this description and adds that the combination

of ei] with the optative by itself is exceedingly rare:

      We only note here that H[atch] and R[edpath] give no more than 13 exx.

      from LXX of ei] c. opt. (apart from 4 Mac and one passage omitted in

      uncials): about 2 of these are wishes, and 5 are cases of w!s(per)

      ei] tij while 2 seem to be direct or indirect questions.3

In spite of the absence of any complete example, grammarians agree on

the form of this condition.

 

The Optatives Used

          Since there are three types of optatives in the New Testament,

it would be useful to inquire as to which one or ones are employed in

conditional sentences. The question, of course, is limited to the

 

          1 Burton, Moods and Tenses, p. 106.

          2 Ibid., p. 107.

          3 Moulton, Prolegomena, p. 196.


                                                                                                    176

protasis, for the use of a@n with the optative in the apodosis marks it

as potential. The optatives in the protasis are not so easily identified.

 

The  Volitive Optative

          Moulton identifies the optative in the protasis as a volitive

optative, or an optative of wish:

      In hypotasis the optative of wish appears in clauses with ei], as is

      shown by the negative's being mh<, as well as by the fact that we can

      add ei], si, if, to a wish, or express a hypothesis without a conjunc-

      tion, by a clause of jussive or optative character.1

Robertson agrees: "The use of the opt. in the protasis of this condition

is probably volitive, since the negative is mh<,"2

          But does the occurrence of mh< automatically indicate a volitive

optative? Heinz challenges Robertson and Moulton on this point, for

he questions whether the presence of this particle should be so inter-

preted. His conclusion is that it should not. He examines the eleven

examples of ei] with the optative and concludes that "The optative in

the protasis of a fourth class condition is normally potential rather

than volitional."3  He grants that five times the protasis of these

conditions has "a slightly volitive" character, but affirms that this

"is determined by the element of purpose involved rather than by any

demands of grammatical structure."4  It seems that his reasoning could

 

          1 Moulton, Prolegomena, p. 196.

          2 Robertson, Grammar, p. 1020.

          3 Heinz, "Optative Moods," pp. 41-42.

          4 Ibid., p. 42.


                                                                                                    177

be reversed and a case made for the volitive over against the potential.

The final answer, though, in no way affects the character of the protasis

in which it is found; only the semantical "fine tuning" is involved.

The meaning stays the same.

 

The Potential Optative

          The potential optative, usually marked by a@n,1 is identified by

Heinz as the "usual apodosis to the fourth class condition."2  This

agrees with Robertson.3   The use of the potential optative in the protasis,

though, is a subject of disagreement. Moulton identifies the usual type

as the volitive optative, since it appears with the particle ei] and

employs mh< as its negative.4  Robertson accepts this, and adds the

observation that the potential optative (with a@n) may appear in the

protasis of such sentences.5  Again, the specific identification of the

type of optative is not essential to the meaning of the sentence. The

basic significance is the same, regardless of how one identifies the

optative involved. The basic constructional pattern will remain the same.

 

          1 Robertson, Grammar, p. 937.

          2 Heinz, "Optative Mood," p. 45.

          3 Robertson, Grammar, p. 1020.

          4 Moulton, Prolegomena, p. 196.

          5 Robertson, Grammar, p. 1020.


                                                                                                    178

                                    The Significance

          Exactly what is the significance of the possible condition? Two

avenues will be explored in answering this question. First, the opinions

of leading Koine grammarians will be investigated. Then, the specific

examples of this condition, or rather the fragments of it, will be

discussed.

 

The Grammarians

Burton

          Burton supports the idea of probability as opposed to the "less

vivid" concept of Classical Greek grammarians. He writes

      The protasis states a supposition which refers to the future,

      suggesting less probability of its fulfillment than is suggested

      by ean with the Subjunctive.

          The protasis is expressed by ei] with the Optative; the apodosis

      by the Optative with a@n.1

          Moulton agrees with Burton's position, acceptably quoting Blass

who also holds to it:

      Meanwhile we may observe that Blass's dictum that the ei] c. opt.

      form is used "if I wish to represent anything as generally possible,

      without regard to the general or actual situation at the moment,"

     suits the NT exx. well; and it seems to fit the general facts

     better than Goodwin's doctrine of a "less vivid future" condition.2

This concept might be paraphrased by the English term "possibility" as

contrasted with the term "probability," which this author reserves for

the subjunctive mood. The latter implies a greater chance of fulfillment

than does the former.

 

          1 Burton, Moods and Tenses, p. 106.

          2 Moulton, Prolegomena, p. 196, note.


                                                                                                    179

Blass-Debrunner

          This grammar states: "Ei] with the optative presents something as

thought of, without regard for reality or unreality, and emphasizes the

hypothetical character of the assumption: 'a potential case.'"1  Funk,

the American editor, repeats this terminology in his own grammar.2  Again,

as with Burton, the emphasis is on the potentiality or possibility of the

condition, not its vividness.

 

Robertson

          The fullest description of the significance of this condition comes

from Robertson:

      This fourth class condition is undetermined with less likelihood of

      determination than is true of the third class with the subj. The

      difference between the third and fourth classes is well illustrated

      in I Pet. 3:13f. So Jesus draws a distinction in Lu. 22:67. The use

      of the opt. in both apodosis and protasis accents the remotness of the

      hypothesis. And yet it is not in the category of unreality as in the

      second class. It floats in a mirage, but does not slip quite away.

      It is thus suitable not merely for real doubt, but it also fits well

      the polite temper of courteous address.3

          In general, then, the grammarians offer agreement on the

significance of this condition. They identify it as one which emphasizes

the possibility of the supposition, rather than its probability; its

 

          1 Blass-Debrunner, Grammar, p. 188.

          2 Robert. W. Funk, A Beginning-Intermediate Grammar of Hellenistic 

Greek, 3 volumes (Missoula, Montana: The Society of Biblical Literature,

1973), II, p. 685.

          3 Robertson, Grammar, p. 1020.


                                                                                                              180

distant potentiality, rather than its closer anticipation. Robertson

uses the term "remote" to describe this concept. It was an unfortunate

choice, since "possibility" better fits the case. The next step in this

discussion is to take a close look at a few New Testament examples of

this condition and see what may be learned from each one.

 

The Specific Examples

Those with the Protasis Implied

          Roberts identifies six potential optatives as ones which imply

a protasis of the possible type.1  Each of these will be considered in

order.

          Luke 1:62.--The first suggested conditional use of the potential

optative is Luke 1:62—ti< a}n qe<loi kalei?sqai au]to< ("what he would like to

call him"). The stated apodosis (a}n qe<loi kalei?sqai) is thought to

imply the protasis "if he could speak." Lenski follows this view:

     The indirect question retains the optative of the direct: "what

     he would wish him to be called," i.e. if he could speak, a condition

     of potentiality (ei] with the optative) in the protasis and the optative

     with a@n in the apodosis.1

Robertson also supplies the words "if he could speak" and calls this

"a conclusion of the fourth-class condition."2

          The conditional element may not be as obvious as these suggest,

though. The English versions do not translate this phrase as a condition.

 

          1 R. C. H. Lenski, The Interpretation of St. Luke's Gospel

(Minneapolis: Augsburg Publishing House, 1961), p. 96.

          2 A. T. Robertson, Word Pictures in the New Testament, 6 volumes

(Nashville: Broadman Press, 1930), II, p. 17.


                                                                                                              181

The New International Version, for example, translates it as "what he would

like to name the child." The use of such terms as "would," "might," etc.

can communicate the concept of potential choice, and that is what is in

view here. The implied protasis is not "if he could speak," but "if he

had a choice." Culture, not silence, limited his selection of a name for

his son as verses 61 and 63 indicate. It does seem fair to list this

passage as an example of an implied condition, but to recognize the

condition as referring to a choice. Even in English questions are

asked which imply a potential or possible choice, but in point of fact,

no choice is possible.

          Luke 6:11.--The statement in Luke 6:11—ti< a}n poih<saien to<

]Ihsou? ("what they might do to Jesus")--is identified by some as implying

the protasis "if they could do something." The remoteness of any oppor-

tunity at this point to inflict injury on Him points to the possible

condition using the optative. Plummer identifies this as an optative

used with an indirect question, though, setting aside the conditional

concept.1  Lenski argues for the conditional idea and expands the

statement: "If we had him in our power, what could we do to him."2

Hendriksen follows Plummer, noting that "the deliberative optative of the

direct question is retained in the indirect question."3

 

          1 Alfred Plummer, A Critical and Exegetical Commentary on the

Gosspel According to S. Luke, volume 28 of The International Critical

Commentary, edited by Samuel Rolles Driver, Alfred Plummer and Charles

Augustus Briggs (Edinburgh: T. g T. Clark, 1896), p. 170.

          2 Lenski, Luke, p. 335.

          3 William Hendriksen, Luke, p. 325.


                                                                                                    182

          So which is it? Does this optative represent an indirect

question without conditional overtones, or does it represent a fragment

of a possible condition? The answer lies in the context: they talked

to one another. This question is one stated in indirect discourse.

Thus the optative poih<saien is not to be understood as a conditional

statement, but one of a simple question.

          Luke 9:46.--This passage—to> ti<j a}n ei@h me<zwn au]tw?n ("which of

them would be the greatest")--is very similar to the one above. Again

the statement could be understood to be a condition, implying the

protasis "if they could be." But it is also a statement of the words

of the apostles which is presented in indirect discourse. Lenski tries

to have it both ways, noting that the indirect question serves as "the

apodosis of a potential condition and the optative with an is left

unchanged in the indirect question."1  The conditional interpretation

seems rather forced, since the theoretical direct question of the

apostles would not have been put as a condition. It is simpler and

more direct to interpret this optative as one of indirect discourse

rather than a conditional one.

          Luke 15:26.--Here there is less question about the lack of a

condition than with the other passages. The statement—ti< a}n ei@h tau?ta

("what these things might be")--implies no condition. It is just the

potential optative with no conditional overtones at all. Roberts

 

          1 Lenski, Luke, p. 544.


                                                                                                              183

identifies the optative as a conditional and supplies the protasis

"If the fact should be told."1  This is an unnecessary concept.

          Acts 5:24, --ti< a}n ge<noito tou?to ("what might come of this") is

at first glance similar to Luke 15:26 and appears to be a simple potential

optative. But, as Alexander notes, there is a future dimension to the

question here: "The question here was not what it was that they beheld

[as in Luke 15:26], but what it would be, if they failed to use preven-

tive measures."2  Also, unlike Luke 9:46, the original direct question

could have been stated, in theory at least, as a condition. Here

Robertson's explanation finds more support than the others:

      Second aorist middle optative of ginomai with a@n, the conclusion

      of a condition of the fourth class (undetermined with less likelihood

      of determination), the unexpressed condition being "if the thing

      should be allowed to go on."3

Since the question has a future concept to it and since the original

question may well have been put as a condition, this will be accepted as

an example of the conditional use of the optative mood.

          Acts 10:17.--Here the optative phrase—ti< a}n ei@h to> o!rama ("what

the vision might mean")--has no conditional overtones. This verse is

parallel to Luke 9:46, for it asks a question of a present reality. In

spite of the fact that both Robertson4 and Lenski5 identify this as an

 

          1 Roberts, "Conditional Sentences," p. 237.

          2 Alexander, Acts, pp. 223-224.

          3 Robertson, Word Pictures, III, p. 64.

          4 Ibid., p. 138.

          5 Lenski, Acts, p. 405.


                                                                                                    184

example of an indirect question implying a condition.

          Summary.--These six passages which Roberts identifies as being

conditional uses of the optative mood need to be reconsidered. One of

them (Luke 1:62) is such a passage, one of them (Acts 5:24) might well

be one, and the rest are not conditional statements. Examples of this

type of conditional statement with the protasis implied are even more

elusive than is popularly thought.

 

Those with the Protasis Stated

          In some verses the condition is stated and the conclusion is

either implied or stated in the form of another type of conditional

sentence. There are no complete examples of conditional sentences using

optative moods in both the apodosis and the protasis.

 

          Acts 8:31.--This sentence takes the form of a mixed condition

wherein the apodosis used the optative mood and the protasis the

indicative—pw?j ga>r a}n dunai<mhn e]a>n mh< tij o[dhgh<sei me; ("How can I

unless someone guides me?”). The protasis is that of a simple condition,

though e]a<n is used with the indicative o[dhgh<sei instead of the usual ei].

The apodosis is that of a possible condition, employing a@n with the

optative dunai<mhn. This phenomenon of mixed conditions is something

that Robertson calls a "common enough phenomenon in the Koine."1

Alexander's comments are in keeping with Moulton's observations on

the optative as an expression of doubt and self-depreciation:

 

          1 Robertson, Word Picture, III, p. 110.


                                                                                                    184

      [This form] expresses in a high degree the speaker's doubt, if not

      as to the absolute intrinsic possibility, at least as to the actual

      and present practicability of the thing in question . . . . Besides

      the modest self-depreciation of this answer, it implies a suspicion,

      if no more, that the stranger who thus suddenly accosted him was

      just such a guide and helper as he needed.1

          The indicative mood in the protasis indicates the real need

the Eunuch felt for a guide, and the optative in the apodosis shows how

improbably he regarded his comprehension. Doubtless Alexander goes too

far when he reads into the indicative the man's recognition of Peter and

his role.

 

          Acts 20:16.—e@speuden ga<r, ei] dunato>n ei@h au]t&?, th>n h[me<ran th?j penthkosth?j gene<sqai ei]j  ]Ieroso<luma ("For he was in a hurry to be in

Jerusalem, if it were possible, before the day of Pentecost"). Roberts

writes that the phrase ei] dunato<n implies "doubt or worry lest the sea

voyage should delay his arrival by that time, thus the less probable

[possible] condition."2 But if this is the protasis, what is the

apodosis? Both Lenski3 and Robertson4 identify this as a possible

condition, but neither identifies the implied apodosis. The best

answer is that there is none. The statement is simply one expressing

doubt in light of the many problems confronting such a voyage.5

 

          1 Alexander, Acts, p. 345.

          2 Roberts, "Conditional Sentences," p. 244.

          3 Lenski, Acts, p. 835.

          4 Robertson, Word Pictures, III, p. 347.

          5 Lenski, Acts, p. 835.


                                                                                                              186

The optative mood fits such a context as this, and such an author as Luke.

 

          Acts 24:19.--This verse presents another mixed condition which

uses an optative mood in the protasis: ou!j e@dei e]pi> sou? parei?nai kai>

kathgorei?n ei@ ti e@xoien pro>j e]me< ("who ought to be before you and accuse

me, if they should have anything against me."). The doubt of the protasis,

emphasized by exoien, is reenforced by the contrary to fact apodosis.

There was no charge against Paul that was valid in a Roman court, nor

were the eye-witnesses present to state such charges as could be

presented. Paul employed the optative mood to underline the doubtful

nature of the whole proceedings. Lenski objects to the identification

of the sentence as a mixed condition, noting that e@dei may be either "an

apodosis of present unreality" or "the imperfect in an obligation that

has not been met."1 The only change this brings about is to identify

the apodosis as one that is implied rather than stated. In either case,

the protasis implies doubt as to the validity of the charge against Paul.

         

          Acts 27:12.--The clause oi[ plei<onej e@qento boulh>n a]naxqh?nai

e]kei?qen, ei@ pwj du<nainto katanth<santej ei]j foi<nika paraxeima<sai ("the

majority decided to sail from there, if somehow they might reach Phoenix

and winter there") is identified by Robertson as one containing the

protasis of a doubtful condition involving the optative du<nainto.2  This

combination "is a condition of the fourth class with the notion of purpose

 

          1 Lenski, Acts,  p. 974.

          2 Robertson, Word Pictures, III, p. 462.


                                                                                                              187

implied and indirect discourse . . . ..”1  Lenski challenges this identifica-

tion, quoting from Robertson's Grammar to show that the shift to optative

is accounted for by the indirect discourse of the statement. He argues

that the optative represents either indirect discourse or a conditional

statement, but not both: "Ei@pwj with the optative is not a condition of

potentiality . . ., because it occurs in indirect discourse."2  Heinz does

not commit himself, noting that this optative expresses "aim or purpose,"

but that it also contains "an element of condition."3  Elsewhere he

speaks of this verb as one that might be introducing indirect discourse,

but which leans "more to the conditional use of the potential optative."4

It seems that Lenski's observations about the optative being either

conditional or involved in indirect discourse are valid, but it also

seems that this particular example is hard to classify. In either case,

the general study is not affected, for if this verb is considered

conditional, then its use is typical: expressing mere probability about

the future outcome of a situation.

 

          Acts 27:39.--As Paul and his shipwrecked party survey the

forbidding shoreline of Malta through the mist and spray, they make out

a small bay, a break in the rocky coast, ei]j o!n e]bouleu<onto ei] du<nainto

e]cw?sai to> ploi?on ("into which, if it were possible, they decided to run

 

          1 Robertson, Word Pictures, III, p. 462.

          2 Lenski, Acts, p. 1072.

          3 Heinz, "Optative Mood," p. 42.

          4 Ibid., p. 68.


                                                                                                              188

the ship"). Luke uses the optative du<nainto either to express an

indirect question on the part of the sailors, "as if the sailors had

said amongst themselves e]cw?somen ei] du<nameqa,"1 or a condition of

vague probability, i.e. possibility. As mentioned above, Robertson

implies that both may be true of a given optative verb, but others

question the dual function in such cases. Which one is found here is

debatable. Moule notes that "In Acts xxvii.39 it is not absolutely clear

in which sense ei] is used: does ei] bouleu<onto ei] du<nainto e]cw?sai mean

they were planning whether they could. . ., or they were planning (if they

could), to . . . ?"2  He does distinguish between the conditional and

indirect discourse usages, but cannot classify this verse.

          Were one to take the optative as that of a condition, then the

verse represents the sailors as viewing the possibility of their

reaching the safety of the bay as theoretically possible at best. The

apodosis, in this case, is not expressed. Certainly the situation was

not one to offer much encouragement to the exhausted crew and weakened

passengers. Granting the conditional nature of this optative, it fits

the general nature of this condition: possibility as opposed to probability.

 

          1 Corinthians 14:10 and 15:37.--Both passages employ the phrase

ei] tu<xoi which is identifies by Arndt and Gingrich as "a formula if it

 

          1 Nicoll, Greek Testament, II, p. 534.

          2 C. F. D. Moule, An Idiom Book of New Testament Greek

(Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1953), p. 151.


                                                                                                              189

should turn out that way, perhaps."1  This formula is used throughout the

Church Fathers, as this lexicon indicates. Robertson observes that these

two examples are the only ones in Paul's writing: "Paul has only the

stereotyped phrase ei] tu<xoi . . . which is a true example of this protasis,

'if it should happen.'"2  The only other optative formula found

frequently in Pauline writings is the familiar mh> ge<noito ("may it not

be"), but this one lacks conditional force. Robertson and Plummer explain

the phrase in terms of indefiniteness. In 14:10 ei] tu<xoi "implies that

the number is large, but that the exact number does not matter."3  In

15:37 it "indicates an indefiniteness which is unimportant."4

          I Peter 3:14.—a]ll ] ei] kai> pa<sxoite dia> dikaiosu<hn ("but even if

you should suffer") offers one of the fullest statements of this type of

condition in the New Testament, and even this lacks a complete apodosis.

Here makarioi ("you are blessed") is the closest one comes. The optative

mood of pa<sxoite implies "the slight possibility that God wills such

suffering for Christians," according to Roberts.5  The context, especially

 

          1 William F. Arndt and F. Wilbur Gingrich, A Greek-English Lexicon

of the New Testament and Other Early Christian Literature, second edition

(Chicago: The University of Chicago Press, 1979), p. 829.

          2 Robertson, Grammar, p. 1021.

          3 Robertson and Plummer, First Corinthians, p. 310.

          4 Ibid., p. 370.

          5 Roberts, "Conditional Sentences," p. 245.


                                                                                                    190

verse 13 (kai> ti<j o[ kakw<swn u[ma?j e]a>n tou? a]gaqou? zhlwtai> ge<nhste

"and who is going to harm you if you are zealous for the good?") provides a note

of victory, hence the suffering of verse 14 is viewed as a possible

cloud on the horizon. It may come about, but it is not guaranteed. This

is the emphasis of the optative. Lenski expresses this idea well when he

writes:

     Peter states it thus in the hope that the readers may, after all,

     despite the threatening clouds that are arising in Rome, escape

     special suffering. To say that he indicates an improbability is not

     exact. What he has in mind is not a balancing of probability and

     improbability. When he looks at the future he expresses his own

     desire that the readers may be spared; yet, if this should not be

     the case, it is really of no moment since any suffering that might

     come would be only blessedness. One always speaks subjunctively

     when using conditional clauses. In this connection Peter wants his

     readers to think of suffering only as something that might come.1

          Winer charts a singular course when he uses this verse to prove

that ei] with the optative is used to denote subjective possibility "when

a condition is regarded as frequently recurring . . . as I Pet. iii.14 . . ."2

Most grammarians, though, limit the sense of the optative to the basic

concept of possibility rather than a repeated situation.

         

          I Peter 3:17.--The other conditional statement which comes the

closest to a complete statement of the possible condition is also found in

I Peter—krei?tton ga>r a]gaqoroiou?ntaj, ei] qe<loi to> qe<lhma tou? qeou?,

pa<sxein h} kakopoiou?ntaj ("It is better, if the will of God should be so, to

suffer for doing good than for doing evil."). Here again the optative qe<loi

 

          1 Lenski, I Peter, p. 148.

          2 Winer, Grammar, p. 293.


                                                                                                              191

communicates the same basic concept as in 3:14--a potentiality, a possibility

of suffering. These two passages, I Peter 3:14 and 17, are considered to be

the fullest expressions of this type of conditional sentence, yet both

are incomplete.

 

                            Translation of the Possible Condition

          The possible condition uses the optative mood to communicate the

sense of possibility rather than probability. The English language

approaches this by the use of such adverbs as "should," "might,"

"maybe," etc. The use of such terms in the common "if . . . then"

formula of conditions can communicate the improbability, the possibility

of the condition.

 

                                            Conclusion

          The possible condition expresses a situation about which the

speaker has significant doubt. The degree of doubt is sufficient to place

the concept in the realm of the less probable, but insufficient to classify

it as impossible. This is accomplished by placing the thought in the

optative mood. Though rare in the New Testament, this mood expresses

the verbal idea as one which is stated as potential. Though the specific

type of optatives in the New Testament are classified differently by

different grammarians, the basic concept is the same.

          The possible condition is as removed from the probable condition

as the optative mood is from the subjunctive. Although the optative

mood and its possible condition were on their way out of Greek when the

New Testament was written, they are still a part, albeit a small part, of


                                                                                                              192

its pages. An understanding of the significance of this mood and its

condition helps the interpreted in those passages where the existing

fragments occur.


 

 

 

                                        CHAPTER VI

 

                                       CONCLUSION

 

          The historical survey of Classical Greek grammarians shows that

the majority of them recognize nine types of conditional sentences. As

the language developed into the Hellenistic phase and then the Koine

of the New Testament, the number of conditional sentences decreased.

Today most Koine grammarians recognize four types of conditions. Of

these, one type is represented only by fragments, for no complete

example of it exists in the New Testament. Thus there are only three

complete types of conditional sentences to deal with in the Greek New

Testament.

          Various systems of classification have been suggested for analyzing

conditional sentences. Among Classical grammarians four such systems have

been used. Goodwin argues for time as the basic principle of classifica-

tion. Smyth arranges them according to their fulfillment. Sonnenschein

argues that their form should be the basis of classification. Gilder-

sleeve puts forth the concept of determination as identified by the mood

of the protasis verb as the guiding principle. Gildersleeve's system,

through Robertson, has been accepted by most Koine grammarians.

          As applied to the New Testament, Gildersleeve's system identifies

four types of conditional sentences. These are classified according to

the determination implied by each sentence. This implication is based

                                                 193
                                                                                                              194

upon the mood of the verbs employed in the protasis. The four types of

determination are (1) determined as real, (2) determined as unreal,

(3) determined as probable, and (4) determined as possible. 

 

                                    Simple Conditions

          Conditions determined as real are called Simple Conditions. They

consist of a protasis which contains the particle ei] and any tense of the

indicative mood. The apodosis may contain any form of the verb. By using

the indicative mood the speaker is presenting the condition from the view-

point of assumed reality. There is no guarantee, absolute or implied, as

to the objective reality of the condition. It is merely stated as

though it were true. Its conclusion naturally follows and is as valid

as the condition upon which it is based.

          One common fallacy of students is to read the concept of objective

reality into this condition. There is no warrant for such an interpre-

tive step, for any proof of such objective reality must come from the

context of the statement and not the statement itself. Although some

grammarians have made statements which could be interpreted as supporting

this view, no one accepts it.

          This condition is called the Simple Condition because it

presents the condition-conclusion relationship in its simplest form.

The condition is stated as an assumed reality, and the conclusion

naturally follows. The latter is as true, and only as true, as is the

former.


                                                                                                              195

                                     Unreal Conditions

          Conditional sentences which are determined as unreal or

unfulfilled are those which state the condition with an implication of

unreality. Rather than implying that the condition is true, these imply

that it is not true. Such conditions use an augmented form of indicative

verbs in the protasus and the apodosis. They usually employ the particles

ei] in the protasis and a@n in the apodosis. The indicative mood is the

correct mood, for the assumption is that the statement is actually unreal.

There is no probability or possibility about it.

          As with the simple condition, this condition presents only an

implication, an assumption, not a direct statement about the condition and

its reality or lack of it. The speaker presents his case as one that he

assumes to be unreal. There is no guarantee in the statement of its

actual or objective unreality. Such objectivity has to come from the

context, not from the sentence. This condition is thus termed the

Unreal Condition, since it presents the condition as one with an

assumption of unreality.

 

                                     Probable Conditions

          Conditional sentences which are determined as probable consist of

a protasis containing any form of the subjunctive mood, usually with e]a<n,

in the protasis and any form of verb in the apodosis. The subjunctive

mood is one which presents an action as potential, rather than actual,

and probable, rather than possible. A subjunctive verb is one which could

well take place in the future, but about which no guarantee or even


                                                                                                              196

implication of reality can be made. It cannot be stated as having

happened, or as one that should not happen, but as one that could

happen. An alternative title might be "conceivable," though it seems

that the term "probable" is sufficient to describe the concept.

          The subjunctive mood enables the speaker to present the condi-

tion as one with a significant degree of probability. This act could

well take place, but there is a chance that it might not. The most

concise title for this concept is Probable as contrasted with Possible.

Thus this condition is termed the Probable Condition.

 

                                     Possible Conditions

          The fourth type of conditional sentence exists only in fragments.

Its complete form is a protasis consisting of ei] with an optative mood

and an apodosis with a@n and an optative mood. The use of the optative

mood presents the condition in the realm of potentiality, but a realm

that is less probable than the subjunctive mood. The speaker does not

present the condition as one that cannot happen, but as one that he does

not expect to happen. The English term employed for this concept is

"possible," as contrasted with the "probable" of the subjunctive mood.

Hence this condition is termed the Possible Condition.

 

                                              Summary

          In summary, then, the New Testament presents three complete

types of conditional sentences and fragments of a fourth.  This author

has termed these (1) the Simple Condition, (2) the Unreal Condition,

(3) the Probable Condition, and (4) the Possible Condition. In more


                                                                                                              197

expanded form these conditions are:

1.       Stated as though assumed real--the Simple Condition

2.       Stated as though assumed unreal--the Unreal Condition

3.       Stated as though assumed probable--the Probable Condition

4.       Stated as though assumed possible--the Possible Condition

          If one wished to consider the Possible Condition as a special use

of the optative mood rather than a type of conditional sentence, then

Moulton's classification becomes eminently usable: Simple Conditions,

Unreal Conditions and Future Conditions with the optative being a special

case of the third catagory. In either case, the optative condition

exists as fragments in the New Testament, reflecting the changing

pattern of Koine as opposed to Classical Greek.

          Anyone who hopes to give an accurate presentation of the content

of the New Testament must take care to handle these conditional

sentences properly. He must not read too much into them, nor fail to

recognize the fulness of their content.


 

 

 

 

                                    APPENDIX I

 

          OCCURRENCES OF THE SIMPLE CONDITION

 

          In the following lists, * indicates that the verb has been

supplied and # indicates a textual problem. Unless otherwise noted,

the United Bible Societies' text has been followed.

 

                  Protasis Using ei] with Present Indicative

                                     (221 examples)

 

Apodosis Using Present Indicative (91 examples)

          Matthew       6:23*

                              6:30*

                              11:14

                              12:27

                              19:10

                              22:45

          Mark            9:42

          Luke             6:32

                              11:19

                              12:26

                              14:26

                              17:2

          John             1:25

                              3:12

                              7:23

                              8:46

                              13:17

                              15:18

         


                                                                                                    199

          Acts             19:38

                              25:11

                              26:8*1

          Romans        2:17-19*2

                              7:16

                              7:20

                              8:9

                              8:10*

                              8:13

                              8:17*

                              8:25

                              8:31*

                              11:6*

                              11:16*

                              11:18

                              12:18*

                              13:9

                              14:15

          I Corinthians 6:2

                              9:2

                              9:12*

                              9:17

                              10:30

                              11:16

                              14:38#

                              15:2

                              15:29

                              15:44

          2 Corinthians          2:2*

                              4:3

                              4:16

                              5:17*

                              8:12*

          1 A. T. Robertson, Word Pictunes in the New Testament, 6 vols.

(Nashville, Tennensee: Broadman Press, 1930), III, p. 445; W. Robertson

Nicoll, editor, The Expositor’s Greek Testament, 5 vols. (Grand Rapids:

Wm. B. Eerdmans Publishing Co., 1967), II, p. 503; and R. C. H. Lenski,

The Interpretation of the Acts of the Apostles (Minneapolis: Augsburg

Publishing House, 1961), p. 1030, all identify this as a simple condition.

          2 Nicoll, Testament, II, p. 599 indicates a textual problem.


                                                                                                    200

          2 Corinthians          11:4

                              11:6*

                              11:15*

                              11:20

                              12:15#

          Galatians      2:14

                              3:18*

                              3:29*

                              4:7*

                              5:11

                              5:18

                              6:3

          Philippians    1:221

                              2:17

                              3:4*

          Colossians    2:5

          I Timothy     1:10

                              3:1

                              5:8

          2 Timothy     2:13

          Hebrews       7:15

                              12:8

          James           1:26*

                              2:8

                              2:9

                              3:2*

                              3:3#

                              4:11

          I Peter          1:6*

                              2:19*

                              3:17*

                              4:4*

          2 Peter          2:6

 

 

          1 R. C. H. Lenski, The Interpretation of St. Paul's Epistles to

Galatians, Ephesians and Philippians Minneapolis: Augsburg Publishing

House, 1961), p. 744 identifies this as a simple condition. Robertson,

Grammar, p. 1023 identifies it as anacoluthon and in his Word Pictures,

IV, p. 440 as a condition.

 

 


                                                                                                              201

          I John           5:9

          Revelation    11:5

                              13:10

                              14:11*

Apodosis Using Present Subjunctive (1 example)

          Galatians      5:25

Apodosis Using Present Imperative (40 examples)

          Matthew       16:24

                              19:171

                              19:21

          Mark            4:23

                              7:16#

                              8:34#2

                              11:25

          Luke             9:23

          John             10:24#

                              10:37

                              10:38

          Acts             4:9

                              13:15

                              19:38

                              25:5

          I Corinthians 7:12

                              7:15

                              7:36

                              10:27

                              11:6*

                              11:34

                              14:35

                              14:37

                              16:22

 

 

          1 Nicoll, Testament, I, p. 249 notes minor evidence [B,D] for

the present tense th<rei in the apodosis. Nestle's and the United Bible

Societies' texts give no discussion of the problem.

          2 Ibid., I, p. 398 indicates that ei@ tij is found in  x,B,C,D,

L and D.

 


                                                                                                              202

          2 Corinthians          13:5

          Galatians      1:19

                              5:15

          Ephesians     4:29*

          Philippians    4:8*

          2 Thessalonians 3:10

                              3:14

          I Timothy     5:4

                              5:16

          Philemon      18

          James           1:5

                              3:14

          I Peter           4:11*

                              4:16

          I John           3:13

          2 John                    10

 

Apodosis Using Imperfect Indicative (2 examples)

          Luke             17:61

          John             8:39#

 

Apodosis Using Aorist Indicative (6 examples)

          Matthew       12:26

                              12:28

          Luke             11:20

          I Corinthians 8:2

 

 

          1 Nicoll, Testament, I, p. 592 identifies this as a first class

condition; R. C. H. Lenski The Interpretation of St. Luke's Gospel

Minneapolis: Augsburg Publishing House, 1961), p. 592 calls this three

types of conditions; and Robertson, Word Pictures, II, p. 226 calls it

a mixed condition.

 


                                                                                                              203

          Galatians      2:21*

          Colossians    1:21

 

Apodosis Using Aorist Subjunctive (6 examples)

          Mark            14:351

                              15:362

          Luke             23:31

          I Corinthians 8:13

                              15:32

          2 Corinthians          2:9

 

Apodosis Using Aorist Imperative (36 examples)

          Matthew       4:3

                              4:6

                              5:29

                              5:30

                              8:31

                              14:28

                              16:24

                              18:8

                              18:9

                              18:28#3

                              19:17

                              19:21

                              26:39

                              26:42

                              27:40

                              27:43

 

          1 R. C. H. Lenski, The Interpretation of St. Mark’s Gospel

(Minneapolis: Augsburg Publishing House, 1961), p. 636 identifies this

as a first class condition.

          2 Nicoll, Testament, I, p. 450 identifies this as a future

supposition.

          3 Ibid., I, p. 243 shows some evidence for o! ti as found in

T.R. instead of ei# ti in the modern texts.

 


                                                                                                              204

          Mark            8:34

                              9:22

          Luke             4:3

                              4:9

                              9:23

                              22:42

                              22:67

                              23:35

                              23:37

          John             7:4

                              13:7

                              18:8

          1 Corinthians          3:18

                              7:9

                              7:21

                              11:6

          Philippians    2:1*

          Philemon      17

          I Peter           1:17

          Revelation    13:9

 

Apodosis Using Future Indicative (29 examples)

 

          Matthew       17:4

                              17:11

                              19:21

          Mark            9:35

          Luke             11:13

                              11:36*

                              12: 28*

                              16:31

          John             3:12

                              5:47

          Acts             5:39

                              18:15

                              19:39

         


                                                                                                              205

          Romans        3:5

                              8:11

                              11:12*

                              11:15*

          I Corinthians 3:12

                              3:14

                              3:17

          2 Corinthians          11:30

          Philippians    3:15

          I Thessalonians 4:14

          I Timothy     3:5

          2 Timothy     2:12

          Hebrews       9:14

          I Peter           4:17*

                              4:18

          Revelation    14:9

 

Apodosis Using Perfect Indicative (10 examples)

          Romans        4:14*

          I Corinthians 8:3

                              9:17*

                              15:13

                              15:16

          I Timothy     5:8

                              6:3

          James                     1:23

                              2:11

          2 Peter          2:20


                                                                                                              206

                 Protasis Using ei] with Aorist Indicative

                                    (56 examples)

Apodosis Using Present Indicative (17 examples)

          Mark            3:26

          Luke             19:9

          John             10:35

                              13:14

                              18:23*

          Romans        3:7

                              4:2

                              6:8

                              15:27

          I Corinthians 4:7

                              9:11*

                              15:32*

          2 Corinthians          3:9*

                              3:11

          Galatians      2:17*

          Colossians    2:20

          I John           4:11

 

Apodosis Using Present Imperative (3 examples)

          Colossians    3:1

          1 Timothy     5:10

          Philemon      18

 

Apodosis Using Imperfect Indicative (6 examples)

          Matthew       26:24

          Mark            14:21*

          John             15:24


                                                                                                              207

          Acts             11:17

          Galatians      3:21

          Hebrews       4:8

 

Apodosis Using Aorist Indicative (8 examples)

          Matthew       11:21

                              11:23

          Luke             10:13

          Romans        5:15

                              11:17

          I Corinthians 2:8

          2 Corinthians          7:12

          Revelation    20:15

 

Apodosis Using Aorist Imperative (3 examples)

          John             18:23

                              20:15

          I Peter           2:3

 

Apodosis Using Future Indicative (16 examples)

          Matthew       10:25*

          Luke             11:18

                              16:11

                              16:12

          John             3:12

                              13:32#

                              15:20 (contains two examples)

          Romans        3:3

                              5:10

                              5:17

                              11:21

                              11:24

          2 Corinthians          3:7*


                                                                                                              208

          Hebrews       2:2

                              12:25*

          Apodosis Omitted (3 examples)

          Luke             19:421

          Acts             17:272

                              23:93

 

                     Protasis Using ei] with Future Indicative

                                        (22 examples)

 

Apodosis Using Present Indicative (5 examples)

          I Corinthians 9:11*

          2 Corinthians          5:3

          I Peter           2:20* (contains two examples)

          Revelation    13:10

 

Apodosis Using Imperfect Indicative (1 example)

          Mark            3:2

Apodosis Using Future Indicative (4 examples)

          Matthew       26:33

          I Corinthians 3:14

                              3:15

          2 Timothy     2:12

 

          1 Lenski, Luke, p. 967.

          2 Robertson, Word Pictures, III, p. 288.

          3 E. W. Bullinger, Figures of Speech Used in the Bible (Grand

Rapids: Baker Book House, 1968 reprint of 1898 edition), p. 154.


                                                                                                              209

Apodosis Using an Infinitive (2 examples)

          Matthew       24:24

          Mark            13:22

Apodosis in an Elliptical Condition (5 examples)

          Mark            11:131

          Acts             8:222

          Romans        1:103

                              11:14

          Philippians    3:11

 

Apodosis Omitted Due to Hebraisms (5 examples)

          Mark            8:124

          Hebrews       3:11

                              4:3

                              4:5

                              6:14

 

                         Protasis Using ei] with Perfect Indicative

                                          (12 examples)

 

Apodosis Using Present Indicative (5 examples)

          Mark            9:42

          Luke             17:2

 

          1 Robertson, Word Pictures, p. 359.

          2 Ibid., I, p. 359; also Nicoll, Testament, I, p. 218.

          3 Robertson, Word Pictures, IV, p. 325.

          4 Ibid., I, p. 331; also Nicoll, Testament, I, p. 394.


                                                                                                    210

          Acts             25:11

          I Corinthians 15:14

                              15:17

 

Apodosis Using Present Imperative (2 examples)

          Acts             16:15

          2 Corinthians          10:7

 

Apodosis Using Aorist Indicative (1 example)

          2 Corinthians          10:7

 

Apodosis Using Future Indicative (3 examples)

          John             11:12

                              14:7#

          Romans        6:5

 

Apodosis Using Perfect Indicative (1 example)

          2 Corinthians          2:5


 

 

 

                                 APPENDIX II

 

OCCURRENCES OF THE CONTRARY TO FACT CONDITION

 

          In the following lists, * indicates that the verb has been

supplied, # indicates a textual problem and + indicates that an is

omitted in the apodosis. Unless otherwise noted, the United Bible

Societies' text has been followed.

 

                    Protasis with ei] and Imperfect Indicative

                                        (21 examples)

Apodosis using Imperfect (15 examples)

          Matthew       23:30

          Luke             7:39

          John             5:46

                              8:42

                              9:33+

                              9:41

                              15:19

                              18:36#

                              19:11+

          Acts             18:14

          I Corinthians 11:31

          Galatians      1:10

          Hebrews       8:4

                              8:7

                              11:15

         

 

 

 

                                             211                                                                                         
                                                                                                    212

Apodosis using Aorist (4 examples)

          John             11:21

                              11:32

                              14:28

                              18:30

 

Apodosis using Pluperfect (2 examples)

          Romans        7:7+

          I John           2:19

 

 

                Protasis with ei] and Aorist Indicative

                               (16 examples)

 

Apodosis using Imperfect (7 examples)

          Matthew       6:5+

                              26:24+

          Mark            14:21*+

          John             15:22+

                              15:24+

          Galatians      3:21

          Hebrews       4:8

 

Apodosis Using Aorist (9 examples)

          Matthew       11:21

                              11:23

                              24:22

          Mark            13:20

          Luke             10:13

          Romans        9:29

          I Corinthians 2:8

          Galatians      4:15+


                                                                                                    213

          Revelation    20:15+1

 

                Protasis with ei] and Pluperfect Indicative

                                     (6 examples)

 

Apodosis Using Imperfect (1 example)

          Acts             26:32+

 

Apodosis using Aorist (4 examples)

          Matthew       12:7

                              24:43

          Luke             12:39

          John             4:10

 

Apodosis using Pluperfect (1 example)

          John             8:19

 

Other Forms

          Matthew       25:27 - protasis implied2

          Luke             17:6 - mixed condition3

                              19:23 - protasis implied4

                              19:42 – aposiopesis5

          John             14:2 - protasis implied6

 

 

          1 A. T. Robertson, Word Pictures in the New Testament, 6 vols.

(Nashville: Broadman Press, 1930), V, pp. 464-465 identifies this as a

first class or simple condition.

          2 Ibid., I, p. 200.

          3 Robertson, Grammar, p. 1022.

          4 Robertson, Word Pictures, II, p. 243.

          5 Ibid., II, p. 246.

          6 Ibid., VI, p. 248.


                                                                                                    214

          I Corinthians 12:19 - protasis = ei] + imperfect, apodosis =

                                                  question

          Hebrews       7:11 - protasis = ei] + imperfect, apodosis =

                                                  question


 

 

                                 APPENDIX III

 

OCCURRENCES OF THE PROBABLE CONDITION

 

          In this list of the occurrences of the probable condition,

all verbs were classified in terms of their form, rather than function.

In periphrastic constructions classification was made on the basis of

the main verb, and the participle was regarded as a "supplimentary"

participle. * means the verb has been supplied, and # indicates a

textual variant.

 

                   Protasis with e]a<n and Present Subjunctive

                                         (105 examples)

 

Apodosis Using Present Indicative (53 examples)

          Matthew       8:2

          Mark            1:40

          Luke             5:12

                              6:23

          John             3:2

                              3:27

                              5:31

                              6:65

                              8:16

                              9:31

                              11:9

                              11:10

                              13:17

                              13:35

                              15:4

                              15:6

                              15:14

                              21: 22*

                              21:23*

                              21:25

 

                                                   215
                                                                                                              216

          Acts             26:5

          Romans        2:25

                              14:8 (contains 4 examples)

          I Corinthians 4:15

                              5:11

                              6:4

                              9:16

                              11:14

                              11:15

                              13:2

                              13:3

                              14:14

                              14:24

          I Thessalonians 3:8

          I Timothy     1:8*

                              3:25

          2 Timothy     2:5

          James           2:14*

                              2:15

                              2:17

          I Peter           3:13*

          I John           1:7

                              1:9

                              2:1

                              2:3

                              2:15

                              3:20

                              3:21

                              4:12

                              5:14

 

Apodosis Using Present Imperative (8 examples)

          Matthew       5:23

          John             7:37

                              10:38

                              12:26

          Romans        12:20

                              13:4

                   


                                                                                                    217

          I Corinthians 7:36

                              14:28

 

Apodosis Using Aorist Indicative (4 examples)

          John             15:6

          I Corinthians 7:28 (contains 2 examples)

          I Thessalonians 2:7

 

Apodosis Using Aorist Subjunctive (3 examples)

          Matthew       26:35

          Luke             20:28

          Acts             13:41

 

Apodosis Using Aorist Imperative (8 examples)

          Matthew       5:23

                              10:13 (contains 2 examples)

          Mark            9:45

                              9:47

          John             10:38

                              15:7

          Colossians    3:13

                   

Apodosis Using Future Indicative (26 examples)

          Matthew       6:22

                              6:23

                              15:14

                              17:20

                              21:21

                              24:48 (contains 2 examples)

          Luke             10:6

                              13:3

                              19:31


                                                                                                              218

          John             6:62*

                              7:17

                              12:26

                              13:35

                              14:15#

                              14:23

          Acts             5:38

          Romans        2:26

                              9:27

          I Corinthians 14:16

                              14:23

                              14:24

                              16:4

          Galatians      5:2

          Hebrews       13:23

          James           4:15

 

Apodosis Using Perfect Indicative (2 examples)

          Romans        2:25

          I Corinthians 13:1

 

Apodosis Using a Participle (1 example)

          Colossians    3:13

 

 

               Protasis with e]a<n and Aorist Subjunctive

                               (177 examples)

 

Apodosis Using Present Indicative (52 examples)

          Matthew       5:46

                              5:47

                              12:29

                              18:12

                              18:13

                              21:26


                                                                                                              219

          Mark            3:24

                              3:27

                              7:3

                              7:4

                              7:11

                              10:12

          Luke             6:34*

                              12:38

                              15:8

          John             3:3

                              3:5

                              6:44

                              7:51

                              8:31

                              8:54

                              12:24

                              12:47

                              13:8

                              14:3

                              19:12

          Acts             15:1

                              27:31

          Romans        7:3

                              11:22

                              15:24

          I Corinthians 7:8*

                              7:39

                              7:40

                              8:8 (contains 2 examples)

                              12:15

                              12:16

                              13:3

                              15:36

                              16:7

          2 Corinthians          5:1

          Hebrews       3:6

                              10:38

          James           2:15*

          I Peter           3:13*

         


                                                                                                              220

          I John                     1:6

                              1:8

                              1:10

                              2:1

                              2:29

                              4:20

 

Apodosis Using Present Subjunctive (3 examples)

          Hebrews       3:7

                              3:15

                              4:7

 

Apodosis Using Present Imperative (11 examples)

          Matthew       5:23

                              18:15

                              18:17

          Mark            13:21

          I Corinthians 7:11

                              10:28

                              14:30

                              15:10

          Galatians      1:8

                              6:1

          James           5:19

 

Apodosis Using Aorist Indicative (4 examples)

          Matthew       18:15

          I Corinthians 7:28 (contains 2 examples)

          James           2:2

 

Apodosis Using Aorist Subjunctive (20 examples)

          Matthew       5:20

                              16:26

                              18:3

                              24:23

                              24:26

         


                                                                                                              221

          Mark            12::19

                              16::18#

          Luke             20:28

                              22:67

                              22:68

          John             4:48

                              8:51

                              8:52

                              9:22

                              11:57

                              16:7

                              20:25

          Acts             9:2

          Romans        10:15

          2 Corinthians          9:4

 

Apodosis Using Aorist Imperative (13 examples)

          Matthew       5:23

                              18:15

                              18:16

                              18:17

                              26:42

          Mark            9:43

                              11:3

          Luke             17:3 (contains 2 examples)

                              22:68

          John             15:7

          I Corinthians 7:11

          Colossians    4:10

 

Apodosis Using Future Indicative (72 examples)

          Matthew       4:9

                              5:13

                              6:14

                              6:15

                              9:21

                              12:11


                                                                                                              222

          Matthew       18:2

                              18:19

                              18:35

                              21:3

                              21:21 (contains 2 examples)

                              21:24

                              21:25

                              22:24

                              24:48

                              28:14

 

          Mark            3:35

                              5:28

                              6:23

                              9:50

                              11:31

 

          Luke             4:7

                              12:45

                              13:5

                              14:34

                              16:30

                              16:31

                              17:4

                              20:5

                              20:6

 

          John             3:12

                              5:43

                              6:51

                              8:24

                              8:55

                              10:9

                              11:25

                              11:40

                              11:48

                              12:32

                              14:3

                              14:14

                              15:7

                              15:10

                              16:7

 

          Romans        7:3

                              10:9

                              11:23


                                                                                                              223

          I Corinthians 4:19

                              8:10

                              14:6

                              14:7

                              14:8

                              14:9

                              14:23

                              14:24

          2 Corinthians          10:8

                              12:6

                              13:2

          I Timothy     2:15

          2 Timothy     2:21

          Hebrews       12:20

          James           4:15

          I John           2:24

                              3:2

                              5:16

          3 John                    10

          Revelation    3:3

                              3:20

                              22:18

                              22:19

 

Apodosis Using Perfect  Indicative (2 examples)

          Romans        7:2

                              14:23

 

 

             Protasis with e]a<n and Perfect Subjunctive

                                 (7 examples)

 

Apodosis Using Present Indicative (3 examples)

          I Corinthians 13:2

                              14:11

          I John           2:29

 


                                                                                                              224

Apodosis Using Future Indicative (1 examples)

          I Corinthians 14:11

 

Apodosis to be Supplied (2 examples)

          2 Corinthians          11:16

          2 Thessalonians 2:3

 

Apodosis in Aposiopesis (1 example)

          Luke             13:91

 

 

             Protasis with a@n and Present Subjunctive

                                  (4 examples)

 

Apodosis Using Present Indicative (3 examples)

          John             5:19

                              13:202

                              16:233

 

Apodosis Using Perfect Indicative (1 example)

          John             20:23b

 

                     Protasis with a@n and Aorist Subjunctive

                                       (1 example)

 

Apodosis Using Perfect Indicative (1 example)

          John             20:23a

 

 

          1 A. T. Robertson, Word Pictures in the New Testament, 6 volumes

(Nashville: Broadman Press, 1930), II, p. 187.

          2 Ibid., V, p. 242.

          3 Ibid., V, p. 271 discusses the condition and Frederick Louis

Godet, Commentary on the Gospel of John, 2 volumes, (Grand Rapids:

Zondervan Publishing House, n.d., reprint of 1893 edition), II, p. 317

discusses a minor textual variant.


                                                                                                              225

                    Protasis with ei] and Aorist Subjunctive

                                   (8 examples)

 

          Luke             9:131

          Romans        11:142

          I Corinthians 9:11#3

                              14:5

          Philippians    3:114

                              3:125

          I Thessalonians  5:106

          Revelation    11:5#7

         

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

          1 Robertson, Word Pictures, II, p. 126.

          2 Ibid., IV, p. 395.

          3 W. Robertson Nicoll, ed., The Expositor’s Greek Testament, 5

volumes (Grand Rapids: Wm. B. Eerdman's Publishing Co., 1967), II, p.

849 and John Peter Lange, ed., Commentary on the Holy Scriptures, 24

volumes reprinted in 12 (Grand Rapids: Zondervan Publishing House, 1960),

X, p. 180.

          4 Robertson, Word Pictures, IV, p. 455.

          5 Ibid., IV, p. 455.

          6 Robertson, Grammar, p. 1017.

          7 Lange, Commentary, XII, p. 215.


 

 

 

                                     BIBLIOGRAPHY

 

Aland, Kurt, et. at., editors. The Greek New Testament. London: United

          Bible Societies, 1966.

Alexander, Joseph Addison. Commentary on the Acts of the Apostles.

          Reprint of 1875 edition. Grand Rapids: Zondervan Publishing

          House, 1956.

Allen, Willoughby C. A Critical and Exegetical Commentary on the Gospel

          According to S. Matthew. Volume 26 of The International Critical

          Commentary. Edited by Samuel Rolles Driver, Alfred Plummer and

          Charles Augustus Briggs. Edinburgh: T. a T. Clark, 1907.

Allinson, Francis G. "Gildersleeve, Basil Lanneay." Dictionary of

          Amenican Biography. 10 volumes, edited by Allen Johnson. New

          York: Charles Scribner's Sons, 1957.

Ball, Francis Kingsley. The Elements of Greek. New York: The MacMillan

          Company, 1927.

Battle, John A., Jr. " The Present Indicative in New Testament Exegesis."

          Unpublished Th.D. dissertation, Grace Theological Seminary, 1975.

Bayfield, M. A. "On Conditional Sentences in Greek and Latin, and

          Indefinite Sentences in Greek." The Classical Review, 4:2 (May,

          1890), 200-203.

________. "Conditional Sentences in Greek and Latin: Indefinite Sentences

          in Greek." The Classical Review, 6:2 (May, 1892), 90-92.

Benner, Allen Rogers and Smyth, Herbert Weir. Beginner’s Greek Book. New

          York: American Book Company, 1906.

Blass, Friedrich. Grammar of New Testament Greek. Translated by Henry

          St. John Thackeray. London: MacMillan and Co., Ltd., 1898.

Blass, F[riedrich] and Debrunner, A[lbert]. A Greek Grammar of the New

          Testament and Other Early Christian Literature. Translated and

          revised by Robert W. Funk. Chicago: University of Chicago Press,

          1961.

Bonner, Robert J. Greek Composition for Schools. Chicago: Scott, Foresman

          and Company, 1903.

 

                                                      226
                                                                                                              227

Boyer, James E. "Greek Exegetical Methods." Unpublished class notes,

          Grace Theological Seminary, n.d.

________. "Semantics in Biblical Interpretation." Grace Journal, 3:2

          (Spring, 1962), 25-34.

Brennan, Paul William. "The Structure of the Koine Greek Narrative."

          Unpublished Th.D. dissertation, The Hartford Seminary Foundation,

          1968.

Broadus, John A. Commentary on the Gospel of Matthew. Volume I of An

          American Commentary on the New Tetament. Edited by Alvah Hovey.

          Philadelphia: The American Baptist Publication Society, 1886.

Bullinger, E. W. Figures of Speech Used in the Bible. Reprint of 1898

          edition. Grand Rapids: Baker Book House, 1968.

Burkitt, F. C. "Mark VIII 12 and Ei in Hellenistic Greek." The Journal

          of Theological Studies, 27:1 (April, 1976), 274-276.

Burton, Ernest DeWitt. A Critical and Exegetical Commentary on the Epistle

          to the Galatians. Volume 35 of The International Critical Com-

          mentary. Edited by Samuel Rolles Driver, Alfred Plummer and

          Charles Augustus Briggs. Edinburgh: T. & T. Clark, 1921.

_________. Syntax of Moods and Tenses in New Testament Greek. Chicago:

          University of Chicago Press, 1897.

Buttmann, Alexander. A Grammar of the New Testament Greek. Translated

          and edited by J. H. Thayer. Andover: Warren F. Draper, Publisher,

          1873.

Buttmann, Philip. A Greek Grammar. Revised and enlarged by Alexander

          Buttmann. Translated from the 18th German edition by Edward

          Robinson. New York: Harper & Brothers, Publishers, 1872.

Chamberlain, William Douglas. An Exegetical Grammar of the Greek New

          Testament. New York: The MacMillan Company, 1952.

Chambers, C. D. "The Classification of Conditional Sentences." The

          Classical Review, 9:2 (May, 1895), 293-294.

Clapp, Edward B. "Conditional Sentences in Aischylas." Transactions of

          the American Philological Association, 18:1 (March, 1887), 43-58.

________. "Conditional Sentences in the Greek Tragedians." Transactions of

          the American Philological Association, 22:1 (March, 1891), 81-92.

________. "Mr. Bayfield on Conditions 'Contrary to Fact.'" The Classical 

          Review, 5:5 (November, 1891), 397-399.


                                                                                                              228

Coleman, N. D. "Some Noteworthy Uses of Ei] in Hellenistic Greek with a

          Note on St. Mark viii 12." The Journal of Theological Studies,

          27:1 (April, 1976), 159-167.

Dana, H. E. and Mantey, Julius R. A Manual. Grammar of the Greek New

          Testament. New York: The MacMillan Company, 1966.

Darby, J. N. The New Testament: A New Translation from the Greek Original.

          Hampton Wick, Kingston-on-Thames: Stow Hill Bible and Tract Depot,

          1961.

Davidson, Chalmers G. "Goodwin, William Watson." Dictionary of American

          Biography. 10 volumes, edited by Allen Johnson. New York:

          Charles Scribner's Sons, 1957.

Davis, William Hersey. Beginner's Grammar of the Greek New Testament.

          5th edition. New York: Harper and Brothers, Publishers, 1923.

Deissman, Adolf. Light From the Ancient East. Translated by Lionel R. M.

          Strachen. Grand Rapids: Baker Book House, 1965.

Donovan, J. "Sonnenschein's Greek Grammar." The Classical Review, 9:1

          (January, 1895), 60-67.

Ellicott, Charles J. A Critical and Grammatical Commentary on St. Paul's

          First Epistle to the Corinthians. Andover: Warren F. Draper,

          Publisher, 1889.

_________. Commentary on the Epistle to the Thessalonians. Reprint of 1861

          edition. Grand Rapids: Zondervan Publishing House, 1957.

The Englishman's Greek Concordance (14 the New Testament. 9th edition.

          London: Samuel Bagster and Sons, Ltd., n.d.

Funk, Robert W. A Beginning-Intermediate Grammar Hellenistic Greek.

          3 volumes. Missoula, Montana: The Society of Biblical Literature,

          1973.

Gary, Geo[rge] L. An Introduction to the Greek of the New Testament.

          Andover: Warren F. Draper, Publisher, 1879.

Gildersleeve, B. L. "Brief Mention." The American Journal of Philology,

          33:4 (December, 1912), 490.

_________. "On Ei] with the Future Indicative and   ]Ea<n with the Subjunctive

          in the Tragic Poets." Transactions of the American Philological

          Association, 7:1 (January, 1876), 2-23.


                                                                                                              229

Gildersleeve, B. L. "Encroachment of Mh< on Ou] in Later Greek." The

          American Journal of Philology, 1:1 (January, 1880), 45-57.

________. "Studies in Pindaric Syntax." The American Journal of Philology,

          3:4 (December, 1882), 434-445.

________.  Syntax of Classical Greek. 2 volumes. New York: American Book

          Company, 1900.

_________. "Transactions of the American Philological Association, 1887,

          vol. XVIII, Boston, 1888." The American Journal of Philology,

          9:4 (December, 1888), 491-492.

Godet, Frederick Louis. Commentary on the First Epistle of St. Paul to

          the Corinthians. 2 volumes. Translated by A. Cusin. Reprint

          of 1886 edition. Grand Rapids: Zondervan Publishing House., 1957.

_________. Commentary on the Gospel Luke. 2 volumes. Translated by

          E. W. Shalders. Reprint of 1887 edition. Grand Rapids: Zondervan

          Publishing House, 1957.

________. Commentary on the Gospel of John. 2 volumes. Reprint of 1893

          edition. Grand Rapids: Zondervan Publishing House, n.d.

Goetchius, Eugene Van Ness. The Language of the New Testament. New

          York: Charles Scribner's Sons, 1965.

Gonda, J. The Character of the Indo-European Moods. Wiesbaden: Otto

          Harrassowitz, 1956.

Goodwin, W[illiam] W[atson]. "A Revision of the Doctrine of Conditional

          Sentences in Greek and Latin." Proceedings of the American

          Academy of Arts and Sciences, 6:4 (December, 1864), 363-379.

_________. An Elementary Greek Grammar. Boston: Ginn Brothers, 1872.

_________. An Elementary Greek Grammar. Revised edition. Boston: Ginn

          and Heath, 1880.

_________. Greek Grammar. Revised by Charles Burton Gulick. Boston: Ginn

          and Company, 1930.

__________. "On the Classification of Conditional Sentences in Greek Syntax."

          Transactions of the American Philological Association, 6:1

          (March, 1873), 60-79.

_________.  "'Shall' and 'Should' in Protasis and their Greek Equivalents."

          Transactions of the American Philological Association, 7:2 (June,

          1874), 87-107.


                                                                                                              230

Goodwin, W[illiam] W[atson]. Syntax of Moods and Tenses of the Greek Verb.

          Boston: Ginn and Company, 1893.

Green, Samuel G. Handbook to the Grammar of the Greek Testament. London:

          The Religious Tract Society, [1886].

Greenlee, J. Harold. "'If' in the New Testament." The Bible Translator,

          13:1 (January, 1962), 39-43.

Greenough, James B. "On some Forms of Conditional Sentences in Latin,

          Greek and Sanskrit." Transactions the American Philological

          Association, 2:2 (June, 1871), 159-165.

________. "Some Features of the Contrary to Fact Condition." Harvard

          Studies in Classical Philology, 7:1 (January, 1896), 13-20.

Hackett, Horatio Balch. A Commentary on the Acts of the Apostles. Volume

          IV of An American Commentary on the New Testament. Edited by

          Alvah Hovey. Philadelphia: American Baptist Publication

          Society: 1882.

Hadley, James. A Greek Grammar for Schools and Colleges. Revised by

          Frederic DeForest Allen. New York: D. Appleton and Company, 1890.

Hale, Clarence B. "First Year New Testament Greek." Mimeographed classroom

          syllabus. Wheaton College, 1950.

Hale, William Garner. "The Origin of Subjunctive and Optative Conditions

          in Greek and Latin." Harvard Studies in Classical Philology,

          12:2 (April, 1901), 109-123.

Harrison, Caskie. "Notes." The Classical Review, 3:10 (October, 1889), 417.

________. "Remarks on Mr. Bayfield's Paper." The Classical Review, 4:3 (June,           1890), 297-298.

Heinz, Vincent. "The Optative Mood in the Greek New Testament."

          Unpublished Th.M. thesis, Dallas Theological Seminary, 1962.

Hendriksen, William. The Gospel of Luke. Grand Rapids: Baker Book House,

          1978.

________. The Gospel of Matthew. Grand Rapids: Baker Book House, 1973.

________.  I and II Thessalonians. Grand Rapids: Baker Book House, 1964.

________. I and II Timothy and Titus. Grand Rapids: Baker Book House, 1965.

          Hiebert, D. Edmund. Second Timothy. Chicago: Moody Press, 1958.


                                                                                                              231

The Holy Bible: Translated from the Latin Vulgate. Los Angeles: C. F. Horan

          Co., 1938.

Horton-Smith, Richard. The Theory of Conditional Sentences in Greek and

          Latin. London: MacMillan & Company., 1894.

Houben, Jeffrey Lawrence. "The Conditional Sentence in Ancient Greek."

          Unpublished Ph.D. dissertation, Princeton University, 1976.

Huddilston, John Homer. Essentials of New Testament Greek. New York:

          The Macmillan Company, 1933.

Jannaris, A. N. An Historical Greek Grammar. London: MacMillan and Co.,

          Limited, 1897.

Jay, Eric G. New Testament Greek: An Introductory Grammar. New York:

          The Macmillan Company, 1958.

Johnson, Allen and Malone, Duman, editors. Dictionary of American

          Biography. 10 volumes. New York: Charles Scribner's Sons, 1960.

Kaegi, Adolf. A Short Grammar of Classical Greek. Translated and edited

          by James A. Kleist. St. Louis, Missouri: B. Herder, 1910.

Katranides, Aristotle. "Conditional Constructions in Modern Greek: A

          Transformational Grammar." Unpublished Ph.D. dissertation,

          Indiana University, 1965.

Kautzsch, E., editor. Gesenius' Hebrew Grammar. Revised by J. E. Cowley.

          London: Oxford University Press, 1910.

Kent, Homer A., Jr. The Pastoral Epistles. Chicago: Moody Press, 1958.

Kinge, John, Jr. "Greek Conditional Sentences." The Bible Translator,

          13:4 (October, 1962), 223-224.

Kittel, Rudolf, editor. Biblia Hebraica. Stuttgart: Privileg. Württ.

          Bibelanstalt, 1951.

Kilhner, Raphael. Grammar of the Greek Language. Translated by B. B.

          Edwards and S. H. Taylor. New York: D. Appleton & Company, 1858.

Lange, John Peter, editor. Commentary on the Holy Scriptures. 24 volumes

          reprinted in 12. Grand Rapids: Zondervan Publishing House, 1960.

La Sor, William Sanford. Handbook of New Testament Greek. 2 volumes.

          Grand Rapids: Wm. B. Eerdmans Publishing Company, 1973.

Lawton, W. C. "Fourth Class Conditions." The Classical Review, 13:2

          (March, 1899), 100-109.


                                                                                                              232

Lejnieks, Valdis. "Mood, Tense and Aspect in Homeric Greek." Unpublished

          Ph.D. dissertation, Princeton University, 1962.

Lenski, R. C. H. The Interpretation of St. Matthew’s Gospel. Minneapolis:

          Augsburg Publishing House, 1961.

________. The Interpretation of St. Mark's Gospel.  Minneapolis: Augsburg

          Publishing House, 1961.

________. The Interpretation of St. Luke's Gospel. Minneapolis: Augsburg

          Publishing House, 1961.

________. The Interpretation of St. John's Gospel. Minneapolis: Augsburg

          Publishing House, 1961.

________. The Interpretation of the Acts of the Apostles. Minneapolis:

          Augsburg Publishing House, 1961.

________. The Interpretation of I and II Corinthians. Minneapolis: Augsburg

          Publishing House, 1963.

_______. The Interpretation of St. Paul’s Epistles to the Galatians,

          Ephesians and Philippians.          Minneapolis: Augsburg Publishing

          House, 1961.

________. The Interpretation of St. Paul’s Epistles to the Colossians, to

          the Thessalonians, to Timothy, to Titus and to Philemon. Minnea-

          polis: Augsburg Publishing House, 1961.

________.  The Interpretation of I and II Epistles of Peter, the Three

          Epistles of John and the Epistle of Jude. Minneapolis: Augsburg

          Publishing House, 1981.

Liddell, Henry George and Scott, Robert. A Greek-English Lexicon. Edited

          by Henry Stuart Jones and Roderick McKenzie. 2 volumes. Oxford:

          At the Clarendon Press, 1951.

Lightfoot, J. B. The Epistle of St. Paul to the Galatians. Reprint of 1866

          edition. Grand Rapids: Zondervan Publishing House, 1966.

________. Notes on the Epistles of St. Paul. Reprint of 1895 edition.

          Grand Rapids: Zondervan Publishing House, 1957.

Lindsell, Harold, editor. The Harper Study Bible, Revised Standard Version.

          New York: Harper & Row, Publishers, 1964.

Machen, J. Gresham. New Testament Greek for Beginners. New York: The

          MacMillan Company, 1951. 


                                                                                                              233

Mattil, A. J. and Mattil, Mary Bedford. A Classified Biography of Litera-

          ture on the Acts of the Apostles. Volume 7 of New Testament Tools

          and Studies. Edited by Bruce Metzger. Leiden: E. J. Brill, 1966.

McKnight, Edgar V. "The New Testament and 'Biblical Greek.'" Journal of

          Bible and Religion, 34:1 (January, 1966), 36-42.

Metzger, Bruce M., editor. Index to Periodical Literature on Christ and

          the Gospels. Volume 6 of New Testament Tools and Studies. Edited

          by Bruce M. Metzger. Grand Rapids: Wm. B. Eerdmans Publishing

          Company, 1962.

________. Index to Periodical Literature on the Apostle Paul. Volume I

          of New Testament Toots and Studies. Edited by Bruce M. Metzger.

          Grand Rapids: Wm. B. Eerdmans Publishing Company, 1960.

Moeller, Henry R. and Kramer, Arnold. "An Overlooked Structural Pattern in

          New Testament Greek." Novum Testamentum, 5:1 (January, 1962), 25-35.

Morris, Charles D. "On Some Forms of Greek Conditional Sentences."

          Transactions of the American Philological Association, 6:1

          (March, 1875), 44-53.

Moore, Jerome. "Four Ways to Say 'If.'" The Baptist Bulletin, 45:1

          (June, 1979), 11.

Moule, C. F. D. An Idiom Book of New Testament Greek. Cambridge:

          Cambridge University Press, 1953.

Moulton, J. H. An Introduction to the Study of New Testament Greek.

          Fourth edition. London: Charles H. Kelly, n.d.

________. A Grammar of New Testament Greek. Volume I: Prolegomena.

          Third edition. Edinburgh: T. & T. Clark, 1908.

_________ and Howard, W. F. A Grammar of New Testament Greek. Volume II:

          Accidence and Word Formation. Edinburgh: T. & T. Clark, 1929.

________ and Milligan, George. The Vocabulary of the Greek Testament.

          Grand Rapids: Wm. B. Eerdmans Publishing Company, 1952.

Moulton, W. F. and Geden, A. S., editors. A Concordance to the Greek

          Testament. Fourth edition. Edinburgh: T. & T. Clark, 1967.

Nestle, Erwin and Kilpatrick, G. D. H KAINH DIAQHKH. Second edition.

          London: The British and Foreign Bible Society, 1958.

The New English Bible. London: Oxford University Press, 1970.


                                                                                                              234

Nicoll, W. Robertson, editor. The Expositor's Greek Testament. 5

          volumes. Grand Rapids: Wm. B. Eerdmans Publishing Company, 1967.

Norbie, Donald. "If by any means . . . ." The Evangelical Quarterly,

          32:4 (December, 1960), 224-226.

Nutting, H. C. "The Modes of Conditional Thought." The American Journal

          of Philology, 24:3 (July, 1903), 278-303.

__________. "The Order of Conditional Thought." The American Journal of

          Philology, 24:1,2 (January, April, 1903), 25-39, 149-162.

Owen, John. An Exposition of Hebrews. 4 volumes. Reprint of 1855 edition.

          Evansville, Indiana: Sovereign Grace Publishers, 1960.

Perrin, Porter and Smith, George H. Handbook of Current English. Third

          edition, edited by Jim W.. Corder. Glenview, Illinois: Scott,

          Foresman and Company, 1968.

Phillips, J. B. The New Testament in Modern English. New York: The

          MacMillan Company, 1962.

Plummer, Alfred. A Critical and Exegetical Commentary on the Gospel

          According to S. Luke. Volume 28 of The International Critical

          Commentary, edited by. Samuel Rolles Driver, Alfred Plummer and

          Charles Augustus Briggs. Edinburgh: T. & T. Clark, 1896.

Pritchett, W. K. "The Conditional Sentence in Attic Greek." The American

          Journal of Philology, 76:1 (January, 1956), 1-17.

Roberts, J. W. "Some Aspects of Conditional Sentences in the Greek New

          Testament." The Bible Translator, 15:1 (January, 1964), 70-76.

__________. "The Use of Conditional Sentences in the Greek New Testament as

          Compared with Homeric, Classical and Helenistic Uses." Unpublished

          Ph.D. dissertation, The University of Texas, 1955.

Robertson, Archibald and Plummer, Alfred. A Critical and Exegetical Commen-

          tary on the First Epistle of St. Paul to the Corinthians. Volume 32

          of The International Critical Commentary on the Holy Scriptures of

          the Old and New Testaments. Edited by Samuel Rolles Driver,

          Alfred Plummer and Charles Augustus Briggs. Edinburgh: T. & T.

          Clark, 1914.

Robertson, A. T. A Grammar of the Greek New Testament in the Light of

          Historical Research. Nashville: Broadman Press, 1934.


                                                                                                              235

Robertson, A. T. A Short Grammar of the Greek New Testament. New York:

          A. C. Armstrong & Son, 1908.

_________. Word Pictures in the New Testament. 6 volumes. Nashville:

          Broadman Press, 1930.

_________ and Davis, W. Hersey. A New Short Grammar of the Greek

          Testament. New York: Harper & Brothers, 1933.

Seager, John, translator. Hoogeveen's Greek Particles.  London: Longman

          and Co., [1830].

Sedwick, S. B. "Sonnenschein, Edward Adolf." Dictionary of National .

          Biography, 1922-1930. Edited by J. R. H. Weaver, London: Oxford

          University Press, 1961.

The Septuagint Version of the and Testament and Apocrapha. London:

          Samuel Bagster and Sons, Limited, n.d.

Sewall, J. B. "On the Distinction Between the Subjunctive and Optative

          Modes in Greek Conditional Sentences." Transaction's of the

          American Philological Association, 5:1 (January, 1874), 77-82.

Simcox, William Henry. The Language of the New Testament. London: Hodder

          and Stoughton, 1898.

Smyth, Herbert Weir. Greek Grammar for Colleges. New York: American Book

          ompany, 1920.

Sonnenschein, E. A. "Horton-Smith's Conditional Sentence." The Classical

          Review, 9:2 (April, 1895), 220-223.

_________.  "Notes on Conditional Sentences." The Classical Review, 1:1,2

          (January, May, 1886), 124-128, 238-239.

________ and Seaton, R. C. "Mr. Bayfield on Conditional Sentences." The

          Classical Review, 6:2 (May, 1892), 199-203.

Tenny, Merrill C., editor. The Zondervan Pictorial Bible Dictionary.

          Grand Rapids: Zondervan Publishing House, 1963.

Thayer, Joseph Henry. Thayer’s Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament.

          Reprint of Corrected Edition. Marshallton, Delaware: The

          National Foundation for Christian Education, n.d.

Thrall, Margaret E. Greek Particles in the New Testament. Volume 3 of

          New Testament Tool's and Studies. Edited by Bruce M. Metzger.

          Grand Rapids: Wm. B. Eerdmans Publishing Company, 1962.


                                                                                                              236

Thwing, Charles. "Burton, Ernest DeWitt." Dictionary of American Biography.

          10 volumes. Edited by Allen Johnson and Dumas Malone. New York:

          Charles Scribner's Sons, 1958.

Tune, Cecil. "The Use of Conditional Sentences in Hebrews." Unpublished

          Th.M. thesis, Dallas Theological Seminary, 1973.

Turner, Nigel. A Grammar of New Testament Greek. Volume III: Syntax.

          Edinburgh: T. & T. Clark, 1963.

Verkuyl, Gerrit, editor. The Holy Bible: The Berkeley Version in Modern

          English. Grand Rapids: Zondervan Publishing House, 1960.

Watson, Dan Riley. "Conditional Sentences in Romans." Unpublished Th.M.

          thesis, Dallas Theological Seminary, 1976.

Webster's Seventh New Collegiate Dictionary. Springfield, Massachusetts:

          G. and C. Merriam Company, 1967.

Wenham, J. W. The Elements of New Testament Greek. Cambridge: At the

          University Press, 1965.

Westcott, Brooke Foss. The Epistle to the Hebrews. London: MacMillan

          and Co., 1889.

_________ and Hort, Fenton John Anthony. The New Testament in the 0riginal

          Greek. New York: The MacMillan Company, 1941.

White, John Williams. The Beginner’s Greek Book. Boston: Ginn & Company,

          1893.

White, W., Jr. "Greek Language." The Zondervan Pictorial Encyclopedia of

          the Bible. 5 volumes, edited by Merrill C. Tenney. Grand Rapids:

          Zondervan Publishing House, 1976.

Who was Who? 5 volumes. London: Adam & Charles Black, 1962.

Winer, G[eorge] B[enedict]. A Treatise on the Grammar of New Testament

          Greek. Ninth English edition, translated and edited by W. F.

          Moulton. Edinburgh: T. & T. Clark, 1882.

________. A Grammar of the Idiom of the New Testament. Seventh edition,

          revised by Gottlieb Lunemann, translated by J. H. Thayer. Andover:

          Warren F. Draper, Publisher, 1893.

Wuest, Kenneth S. The Gospels: An Expanded Translation. Volume I of

          Wuest' Expanded Translation of the Greek New Testament. Grand

          Rapids: Wm. B. Eerdmans Publishing Company, 1956.


                                                                                                              237    

Wuest, Kenneth S. Treasures From the Greek New Testament. Grand Rapids:

          Wm. B. Eerdmans Publishing Company, 1957.

Yenni, Rev. D. A Grammar of the Greek Language. D. & J. Sadlier & Co.,

          1878.

Zerwick, Maximilian. Biblical Greek. Translated by Joseph Smith. Rome:

          Scripta Pontificii Instituti Biblici, 1963.

 

 

Please report any errors to Ted Hildebrand:  

 

||    Pope Shenouda    ||    Father Matta    ||    Bishop Mattaous    ||    Fr. Tadros Malaty    ||    Bishop Moussa    ||    Bishop Alexander    ||    Habib Gerguis    ||    Bishop Angealos    ||    Metropolitan Bishoy    ||

||    The Orthodox Faith (Dogma)    ||    Family and Youth    ||    Sermons    ||    Bible Study    ||    Devotional    ||    Spirituals    ||    Fasts & Feasts    ||    Coptics    ||    Religious Education    ||    Monasticism    ||    Seasons    ||    Missiology    ||    Ethics    ||    Ecumenical Relations    ||    Church Music    ||    Pentecost    ||    Miscellaneous    ||    Saints    ||    Church History    ||    Pope Shenouda    ||    Patrology    ||    Canon Law    ||    Lent    ||    Pastoral Theology    ||    Father Matta    ||    Bibles    ||    Iconography    ||    Liturgics    ||    Orthodox Biblical topics     ||    Orthodox articles    ||    St Chrysostom    ||   

||    Bible Study    ||    Biblical topics    ||    Bibles    ||    Orthodox Bible Study    ||    Coptic Bible Study    ||    King James Version    ||    New King James Version    ||    Scripture Nuggets    ||    Index of the Parables and Metaphors of Jesus    ||    Index of the Miracles of Jesus    ||    Index of Doctrines    ||    Index of Charts    ||    Index of Maps    ||    Index of Topical Essays    ||    Index of Word Studies    ||    Colored Maps    ||    Index of Biblical names Notes    ||    Old Testament activities for Sunday School kids    ||    New Testament activities for Sunday School kids    ||    Bible Illustrations    ||    Bible short notes

||    Pope Shenouda    ||    Father Matta    ||    Bishop Mattaous    ||    Fr. Tadros Malaty    ||    Bishop Moussa    ||    Bishop Alexander    ||    Habib Gerguis    ||    Bishop Angealos    ||    Metropolitan Bishoy    ||

||    Prayer of the First Hour    ||    Third Hour    ||    Sixth Hour    ||    Ninth Hour    ||    Vespers (Eleventh Hour)    ||    Compline (Twelfth Hour)    ||    The First Watch of the midnight prayers    ||    The Second Watch of the midnight prayers    ||    The Third Watch of the midnight prayers    ||    The Prayer of the Veil    ||    Various Prayers from the Agbia    ||    Synaxarium